FCC ID: AZ492FT7080 Mobile 2-Way Radio

 

m MOTOTRBO Mobile Installation Guide XPRTM 4350/XPRTM 4380 Numeric Display Mobile (with GPS) XPRTM 4550/XPRTM 4580 Display Mobile (with GPS) XPRTM 5350/XPRTM 5380 Numeric Display Mobile (with Bluetooth XPRTM 5550/XPRTM 5580 Color Display Mobile (with Bluetooth XPRTM 5350e/XPRTM 5380e Numeric Display Mobile (with WLAN, XPRTM 5550e/XPRTM 5580e Color Display Mobile (with WLAN, and GPS) and GPS) Bluetooth and GPS) Bluetooth and GPS)

*6880309T23*

6880309T23-FA

-i 0 Foreword This manual is intended for use by experienced technicians familiar with similar types of equipment. Specifically, it contains installation information required for the XPR Series Mobile Radios. For information related to the service of the XPR Series Mobile Radios, refer to Related Publications on page v for the list of applicable manuals available separately. Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance See Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards on page ii. Manual Revisions Changes which occur after this manual is printed are described in PMRs (Publication Manual Revisions). These PMRs provide complete replacement pages for all added, changed, and deleted items. To obtain PMRs, go to:

https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com Parts Ordering See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering for information on how to obtain replacement parts. For part numbers, refer to the service manuals listed in Related Publications on page v. Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Document Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2006 2015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards ATTENTION!

This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Safety Standards:

Install only Motorola approved antennas and accessories. Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation on page 2-11 of this manual. Be sure that Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio. Before using this product, the operator must be familiar with the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with each radio (Motorola publication part number 6881095C99_) to ensure compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) energy exposure limits.

!

!

W A R N I N G For radios installed in vehicles fuelled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. This radio has a transmitter Time-out Timer that disables the transmitter during a transmission after a pre-

defined time period, which by default is set to 60 seconds. It is recommended NOT to change the default 60 seconds time period for the Time-out Timer as the radio is intended for intermittent duty cycle operation. C a u t i o n For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following web site, which lists approved accessories for your radio model:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com ii Table of Contents Table of Contents iii Foreword..........................................................................................................i Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance.............................................................................................i Manual Revisions .........................................................................................................................................i Parts Ordering ..............................................................................................................................................i Computer Software Copyrights ....................................................................................................................i Document Copyrights...................................................................................................................................i Disclaimer.....................................................................................................................................................i Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................................i Chapter 1 Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards.......................ii Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme....................................................vi Commercial Warranty .................................................................................viii Limited Warranty ...................................................................................................................................... viii MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS.............................................................................. viii I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long.................................................................... viii II. General Provisions.................................................................................................................ix III. State Law Rights ...................................................................................................................ix IV. How to Get Warranty Service ...............................................................................................ix V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover.....................................................................................ix VI. Patent and Software Provisions.............................................................................................x VII. Governing Law......................................................................................................................x Introduction ......................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Mobile Radio Description............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 Connections on the Back of the Radio ............................................................................. 1-4 1.2 Standard Configurations ................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration (XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Mobiles Only).................... 1-5 1.3 Base/Control Stations .................................................................................................................... 1-6 Installation Details for Standard Configurations ............. 2-1 2.1 Planning the Installation................................................................................................................. 2-1 Tools Required for Installation .......................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 2.1.2 Installation Example.......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 Wiring Diagrams ............................................................................................................... 2-2 2.2 Radio Mounting ............................................................................................................................ 2-4 Locking Kit (Optional) ....................................................................................................... 2-6 2.2.2.1 All Radios................................................................................................................. 2-6 2.2.3 DIN Mount......................................................................................................................... 2-6 To install the frame into the dashboard ................................................................... 2-6 To Mount the radio in the frame............................................................................... 2-7 To Remove the radio from the frame....................................................................... 2-8 2.2.4 Remote Mount with Trunnion............................................................................................ 2-8 2.3 Power Cable .................................................................................................................................. 2-8 Chapter 2 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 2.2.3.3 2.2.2 iv 2.6.1 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 Chapter 3 2.4 Ignition Sense Cable.................................................................................................................... 2-11 2.5 Antenna Installation ..................................................................................................................... 2-11 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle ........................................ 2-11 Antenna Installation Procedure....................................................................................... 2-12 Antenna Connection ....................................................................................................... 2-13 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip ........................................................................................................... 2-14 Standard Hang-Up Clip................................................................................................... 2-14 2.7 Completing the Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-14 Options and Accessories Installation ............................... 3-1 3.1 Accessory Installation .................................................................................................................... 3-1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation............................................................ 3-3 3.1.1 3.1.2 Horn and Lights (External Alarm) Relay ........................................................................... 3-4 External Speaker ............................................................................................................. 3-5 3.1.3 Chapter 4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting................ 4-1 4.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing..................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring................................... 4-2 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines...................................................... 4-2 4.3 4.4 Jump-Start the Vehicle .................................................................................................................. 4-3 4.5 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker.................................................................................... 4-3 Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering............................................. A-1 A.1 Basic Ordering Information ............................................................................................................A-1 A.2 Motorola Online .............................................................................................................................A-1 A.3 Mail Orders ....................................................................................................................................A-1 A.5 Fax Orders.....................................................................................................................................A-2 A.6 Parts Identification .........................................................................................................................A-2 A.7 Product Customer Service.............................................................................................................A-2 Appendix B Motorola Service Centers .................................................. B-1 B.1 Servicing Information .....................................................................................................................B-1 B.2 Motorola Service Center ................................................................................................................B-1 B.3 Motorola Federal Technical Center ...............................................................................................B-1 B.4 Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center .............................................................................B-1 Index .....................................................................................................Index-1 List of Figures List of Figures v Figure 1-1 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series .......... 1-2 Figure 1-2 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBOXPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series .......... 1-2 Figure 1-3 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series ......................................................................... 1-3 Figure 1-4 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series ......................................................................... 1-3 Figure 1-5 Back View of the Mobile Radio ............................................................................................. 1-4 Figure 1-6 Dash Mount Configuration .................................................................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-7 Example of a Base/Control Station Configuration................................................................. 1-6 Figure 2-1 Typical Dash Mount Configuration ........................................................................................ 2-1 Figure 2-2 Typical Remote Mount Configurations .................................................................................. 2-2 Figure 2-3 Radio Installation (Dash Mount)............................................................................................ 2-2 Figure 2-4 Radio Installation (Remote Mount) ....................................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-5 Trunnion Orientation for Above or Below Mobile .................................................................. 2-4 Figure 2-6 Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................... 2-5 Figure 2-7 Below Dash Trunnion Mounting............................................................................................ 2-5 Figure 2-8 Locking Kit (Optional)............................................................................................................ 2-6 Figure 2-9 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series.................................. 2-7 Figure 2-10 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000eSeries................................... 2-7 Figure 2-11 Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount..................................................................... 2-9 Figure 2-12 Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount............................................................... 2-10 Figure 2-13 Antenna connections on the back of the radio.................................................................... 2-12 Figure 2-14 Mini-UHF Connection ......................................................................................................... 2-13 Figure 3-1 Location of the Rear Accessory Connector .......................................................................... 3-1 Figure 3-2 Pin Configuration of Rear Accessory Connector (as viewed from the rear of the radio) ...... 3-2 Figure 3-3 Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 3-3 Figure 3-4 Horn and Lights Wiring Diagram........................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-5 External Speaker Mounting................................................................................................... 3-5 Related Publications MOTOTRBO XPR 4350/4550 Mobile Basic Service Manual .....................................................6880309T21_ MOTOTRBO XPR 4380/4580 Mobile Basic Service Manual ..................................................68009272001_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5350/5550 Mobile Basic Service Manual .................................................. 68009515001_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5580/5380 ............................................................................................. MN000305A01_ MOTOTRBO XPR 5000e Series Mobile Service Manual.......................................................MN002201A01_ vi Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme C 6 9 7 R 8 A 9 1 10 A 11 N 12 Below is the model numbering scheme for XPR 5000e:

Model No.Example :

AA M Q 2 8 J Position

:

1 2 3 4 5 AZ: Asia LA: Latin America AA: North America MD: Europe Mobile MOTOTRBO Mobile XPR 5000e Series : 28 Band J

: 136174 MHz M

: 217222 MHz K : 300360 MHz P

: 350400 MHz Q

: 403470 MHz T

: 450527 MHz X

: 450520 MHz U

: 806941 MHz V

: 806870 MHz Power Level N: 125 W P: 2540 W Q: 2545 W R: 140 W M: 1035 W Physical Packages C: Numeric Display H: Monochrome Display N: Color Display X: No Control Head Below is the numbering scheme of XPR 4000 and 5000 series. H Model No.Example :

AA M Q P 2 7 Position

:

1 2 3 4 5 6 AZ: Asia LA: Latin America AA: North America (except Mexico) MD: Europe/Middle East/

Africa/Australasia Mobile Mobile Model Series MOTOTRBO XPR 4000 Series: 27 MOTOTRBO XPR 5000 Series: 28 Band J : 136174 MHz Q: 403470 MHz T : 450527 MHz X : 450520 MHz U : 806941 MHz Power Level N: 125W R: 140W M: 1035W P: 2540W Q: 2545W Physical Packages C: Numeric Display Model H: Monochrome Display Model

(XPR 4000 Series) N: Color Display Model

(XPR 5000 Series) Unique Variations N: Standard Package Version Letter Feature Level 1: Mini-U (Mobile) 2: BNC (Mobile) Primary System Type A: Conventional B: Trunking C: Analog Only D: Limited System E: Modified Conventional Primary Operation J: Basic (No GNSS, no Bluetooth) K: GNSS (GPS or GLONASS) and Bluetooth L: GPS only M: Bluetooth only R: GNSS, WiFi and Bluetooth S: WiFi and Bluetooth only V: Basic (No WiFi, No GNSS, No Bluetooth, No embedded GOB) W: GNSS only Channel Information 9: Variable/Programmable Channel Spacing 9 7 L 8 A 9 1 10 A 11 N 12 Unique Model Variations N: Standard Package Version Letter Feature Level 1: Mini-U 2: BNC Primary System Type A: Conventional B: Trunking C: Analog Only Primary Operation J: Basic (w/o Bluetooth or GPS) K: w/ Bluetooth and GPS L: w/ GPS Only M: w/ Bluetooth Only Channel Spacing 9: Variable/Programmable vii

. Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Notes viii Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long MOTOROLA INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

XPR Series Mobile Radios Product Accessories Two (2) Years One (1) Year The mobiles additionally ship with a standard 1-year Repair Service Advantage (RSA) (for U.S. customers) or 1-year Extended Warranty (for Canada customers). However, at the time of order, you may choose to omit these warranties. For more RSA or Extended Warranty information, please refer to the price pages or Motorola Online (https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com) > Resource Center > Services > Service Product Offerings > Repair Service Advantage or Extended Warranty. Motorola, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. Commercial Warranty II. General Provisions ix This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA's option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. State Law Rights SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. How to Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola at 1-888-567-7347 US/Canada. V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover A. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. C. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. D. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs

(including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G. Rechargeable batteries if:

- any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

- the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H. Freight costs to the repair depot. x Commercial Warranty I. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K. Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. Patent and Software Provisions MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A. B. that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C. should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for XPR Series Mobile Radios and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, and accessories. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description 1.1.1 Overview Model XPR 4300 XPR 4350/

XPR 4380 XPR 4500 XPR 4550/

XPR 4580 XPR 5350 XPR 5550 XPR 5580 XPR 5380 XPR 5350e XPR 5550e XPR 5580e XPR 5380e Description Numeric Display model with 2 programmable buttons and a 2-character 7-segment display. Numeric Display model with 2 programmable buttons, a 2-character 7-segment display, and GPS. Display model with 4 programmable buttons and a dot-matrix LCD. Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a dot-matrix LCD, and GPS. Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, Bluetooth, and GPS. Colour Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a colour LCD, Bluetooth, and GPS. Colour Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a colour LCD, Bluetooth, and GPS. Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, Bluetooth, and GPS. Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. Color Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a color LCD, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. Color Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a color LCD, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. Numeric Display model with 4 programmable buttons, a 2-

character 7-segment display, WLAN, Bluetooth, and GPS. 1-2 1.1.2 Dimensions Introduction Mobile Radio Description Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4 show the basic dimensions of the dash mount trunnion of the mobile radio. When installing the radio, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections; in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling; and to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion wing screws. 8.2 6.8 Figure 1-1 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/

XPR 4000e Series 8.2 6.9 Figure 1-2 Front View of Dash Mount Trunnion for MOTOTRBOXPR 5000/

XPR 5000e Series Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-3 8.3 7.9 2 2.4 Figure 1-3 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series NOTE: The MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile models use wing screws with thread length of 14.9 mm while the XPR 5000/XPR 5000eSeries models require wing screws with thread length of 9.9 mm to secure the radio to the mounting trunnion. 8.1 7.4 2.1 2.5 Figure 1-4 Side View of Dash Mount with Low Profile Trunnion for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series NOTE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in (19.1 mm) to the overall length. 1-4 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1.1.3 Connections on the Back of the Radio Figure 1-5 shows the connections that are found on the back of the radio. For complete pin configuration of the rear accessory connector, see Figure 3-2 on page 3-2. Rear Accessory Connector Antenna Connector Battery+ Battery-

Figure 1-5 Back View of the Mobile Radio GPS-Antenna Connector Introduction Standard Configurations 1-5 1.2 Standard Configurations The XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile can be either dash mounted or remote mounted. The XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series mobile can only be dash mounted at this time. 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration In the dash mount configuration of the mobile radio, the control head is mounted on the front of the transceiver housing. Electrical connection between the two takes place within the radio via a flexible cable between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the control head. Figure 1-6 Dash Mount Configuration For details on this configuration, see Section 2.2.1 on page 2-5. 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration (XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Mobiles Only) In the remote control version, the control head and the transceiver are mounted separately in the vehicle. The control head is mounted in a remote trunnion (PMLN4912_) near the operator using an extension cable. The transceiver is mounted using one of the trunnion mounting options shown in Table 2-1 on page 2-4. If the transceiver is located in a car trunk, be sure that secure mounting and sufficient cooling are provided. Do not cover the transceiver with baggage, blankets, etc. See publication 6878397A01 for the MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Mobile Radio remote mount control head installation instructions. 1-6 1.3 Introduction Base/Control Stations Base/Control Stations If the mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the radio and antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed in the Safety Booklet (Motorola publication part number 68P81095C99_) provided with the radio:

For outdoor antenna installations, proper site grounding and lightning protection are vitally important. Failure to provide proper lightning protection may result in permanent damage to the radio equipment. Refer to Motorola Quality Standards Fixed Network Equipment Installation Manual R56 (which can be obtained by ordering CDROM 9880384V83) for complete information regarding lightning protection. C a u t i o n The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible and the antenna cable should be earth grounded. The radio chassis must be earth grounded and a lightning surge protector should be used in line with the radio connector and the outdoor antenna. The lightning surge protector should be earth grounded and located at the point where the antenna cable enters the building. The line voltage power supply must have a proper ground connection. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements. Also, additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions may be required in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. Figure 1-7 shows a typical setup of a Base/Control Station configuration. Line Cord with Ground Wall-

outlet Power Supply Lightning Protector With Quarter Wave Shorting Stub Outdoor Antenna Desktop Power Cable Antenna Cable Antenna Connector Radio in Desktop Tray Speaker Desk Microphone C C C C C CCCCCC C C C C C C C C C C C CCCCC CCCCC C C C C Figure 1-7 Example of a Base/Control Station Configuration Chapter 2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations 2.1 Planning the Installation The mobile radio operates only in negative ground electrical systems. Before starting the radio installation, make sure that the ground polarity of the vehicle is correct. Accidentally reversing the polarity will not damage the radio, but will cause the cable fuses to blow. Planning is the key to fast, easy radio installation. Before starting the installation, inspect the vehicle and determine how and where you intend to mount the antenna, radio, and accessories. Plan wire and cable runs to provide maximum protection from pinching, crushing, and overheating. Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual. The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. C a u t i o n 2.1.1 Tools Required for Installation Tool Motorola Part Number 11/32 hex driver Rubber-coated pliers Regular slot screwdriver or Phillips #2 Pin removal tool 1/4 hex driver 6680163F01 2.1.2 Installation Example The mobile two-way radio offers various methods of installation, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. The radio can be a dash or remote mount (XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series models can only be dash mounted). (See Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2). Speaker Antenna 1/4-Wavelength Radio Battery Figure 2-1 Typical Dash Mount Configuration 2-2 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Speaker Control Head Antenna - Wavelength Radio Battery Control Head Figure 2-2 Typical Remote Mount Configurations 2.1.3 Wiring Diagrams Figure 2-3 shows the wiring diagrams for some of the possible configurations. Identify the configuration that you are installing, and use the diagram when planning the installation. GPS ANTENNA RED LEAD FIREWALL HOLE RF ANTENNA DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION FUSE BATTERY

(+)

(-) FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE HORN/

LIGHT FUSE MIC CLIP SPEAKER MIC CONTROL HEAD EMERGENCY SWITCH Figure 2-3 Radio Installation (Dash Mount)

(For complete rear accessory connector pin configuration, see Figure 3-2.) Installation Details for Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-3 GPS ANTENNA RED LEAD FIREWALL HOLE RF ANTENNA DC POWER CABLE TRUNNION ANTENNA CONNECTION FUSE BATTERY

(+)

(-) FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE HORN/

LIGHT FUSE SPEAKER EMERGENCY SWITCH MIC CLIP CONTROL HEAD MIC

(For complete rear accessory connector pin configuration, see Figure 3-2.) Figure 2-4 Radio Installation (Remote Mount) 2-4 2.2 Radio Mounting Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic dashboard without first reinforcing the dashboard; the weight of the radio may crack or break the dashboard. DO NOT mount the radio on a flat or concave surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. This is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. C a u t i o n C a u t i o n C a u t i o n The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that will permit routing the RF antenna cable as directly as possible. For new or existing installations, use one of the mounting kits as specified in Table 2-1. Orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 2-5. Table 2-1. Mounting Kits Mounting Kit Low Profile Trunnion Kit (ships as part of mobile radio package) Low Profile Trunnion Kit (ships in a box intended for resale) Standard Profile Trunnion Kit Key Lock Trunnion Kit DIN Mount Kit Motorola Part Number for XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Motorola Part Number for XPR 5000/XPR 5000e Series RLN6076_ RLN6077_ RLN6078_ RLN6079_ RLN5933_ RLN6469_ RLN6466_ RLN6467_ RLN6468_ RLN6465_ RADIO FRONT Figure 2-5 Trunnion Orientation for Above or Below Mobile Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-5 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion 1. Select the location to mount your radio on the transmission hump (see Figure 2-6) or under the dash (see Figure 2-7). When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump take care the transmission housing is not affected. 2. Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outermost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 3. Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 4. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the self-drilling screws provided. The number of screws used will depend on how the radio is mounted (see Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7). 5. Position the radio to align the trunnion with the trunnion mounting features on the radio (see Figure 2-6). Secure the radio with the two wing screws and lock washers (position the flat side of the washer to the thumbscrew and the washer sharp side to the trunnion) provided. Wing Screw Lock Washer Trunnion Threaded Hole for Wing Screw Lock Washer Tabs Wing Screw Figure 2-6 Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting Trunnion Wing Screw Lock Washer Lock Washer Wing Screw Figure 2-7 Below Dash Trunnion Mounting 2-6 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.2 Locking Kit (Optional) 2.2.2.1 All Radios If an optional locking kit is used (shown in Figure 2-8), position the lock bottom housing on the trunnion before installing the radio mounting screws. Then slip the top lock housing on and remove the key. You can install the lock on either side of the radio. Lock Figure 2-8 Locking Kit (Optional) 2.2.3 DIN Mount 2.2.3.1 To install the frame into the dashboard 1. Open up the radio cut-out in the dashboard to ISO7736 specification (182 mm x 53 mm). Insert the mounting frame into the cut-out and retain it by bending back the relevant fixing 2. tabs (using all 6 where possible). Check the orientation of the frame is correct by ensuring that the word TOP is uppermost. NOTE: The tabs are easily bent back by twisting a large flat-head screwdriver in the slot behind the tabs. NOTE: For a more secure installation the frame should also be secured with the appropriate number of screws to the mounting conditions (min. 1). NOTE: The demounting tool can be used as an aid to mounting as well as demounting. Installation Details for Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-7 2.2.3.2 To Mount the radio in the frame 1. Provide the electrical connections for the radio (power, antenna, accessories). 2. Plug in all the connectors and push the radio firmly into the mounting frame until the two springs snap into place (shown in Figure 2-9). Fixing Tabs Fix screws here to secure frame DIN Mount RLN5933_ Demounting Tool Figure 2-9 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series Fixing Tabs Fix screws here to secure frame DIN Mount RLN6465_ Demounting Tool Figure 2-10 Dashboard Mounting for MOTOTRBO XPR 5000/XPR 5000eSeries 2-8 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable 2.2.3.3 To Remove the radio from the frame 1. Push the two demounting tools through the openings in the frame until the two springs release the radio. 2. Slide out the radio. NOTE: The fixing tabs should be checked for tightness each time the radio is removed. The tabs are easily tightened by twisting a large flat-head screwdriver in the slot behind the tabs. NOTE: The frame is not designed for regular mounting and demounting. 2.2.4 Remote Mount with Trunnion Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual. C a u t i o n The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Before making any holes in the trunk for radio mounting, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual for restrictions (e.g. due to the gas tank location). For a remote mount installation, the transceiver may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, provided that the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance as well as cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola is the vehicles trunk. The trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same as for the dash mount installation. See publication 6878397A01 for the MOTOTRBO XPR 4000/XPR 4000e Series mobile radio remote mount control head installation instructions. Power Cable Route the red radio power cable from the radio to the vehicles battery compartment, using accepted industry methods and standards. Be sure to grommet the firewall hole to protect the cable. Remove the 15-Amp (part number 6580283E06) or 20-Amp (part number 6580283E07) fuse from the fuseholder and connect the red lead of the radio power cable to the positive battery terminal using the hardware provided as shown in Figure 2-12. Connect the black lead to a convenient solid chassis ground point. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the batterys negative terminal. 2.3 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable 2-9 Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O

=

T N E M T R A P M O C O D A R I I N O T U A C I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I i d n a n o i t a r e p o o d a r r o f l a i t n e s s e s i l e b a c r e w o p l i

. t i k e b a c d n a o d a r e h t o t e g a m a d t n e v e r p o t y r a m l i i r p k c a b e h t a v n o i t c e n n o c s s s a h c i d o o g A

)

-

(

)

+

(

F O T R A P I E L C H E V I G N R W I T E M M O R G E T O N E E S C C A N O

/

E S U F A 4 R O A 3 I N O T N G I I I O D A R

) D E R n h t

(

i E L B A C A 0 2 R O A 5 1 E S U F E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I

) T O H Y R E T T A B D E R

/

(

E N O H P O R C M I H C I O D A R R E K A E P S r o t c e n n o c r a e R l

. e b a r i s e d s i e m a r f e c h e v e h t o i l t n o i t c e n n o C

) D N U O R G K L B

/

(

E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I i

) g n n n u r r o t a n r e t l a

. e

. i

(

Y R E T T A B I E L C H E V O

-

6 4 6 7 2

-

F P E A M

. N O d e n r u t s i h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t n e h w n o i t c n u f y n o l l i l i w o d a r e h t

, h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t o t d e r i w s i e n i l I N O T N G I I s o d a r i e h t f I t n u o M h s a D r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C 1 1

-

2 e r u g F i i g n n n u r t o n s i n o i t i n g i s r a c i e h t n e h w o d a r e h t f o e s u s s e c x e

, y r e t t a b s r a c e h t o t y l t c e r i d e n i l I N O T N G I I s o d a r i e h t t c e n n o c o t e s o o h c u o y f i

:

n o i t u a C

. F F O r o N O h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s r a c e h t h t i w e t a r e p o o t o d a r e h t s w o i l l a n o i t a r u g i f n o c s h T i

. y r e t t a b s r a c e h t f o e g r a h c s d w o s l i a n i t l u s e r l d u o c

:

E T O N 2-10 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Power Cable F O T R A P I E L C H E V I G N R W I

)

-

(

)

+

(

i

) g n n n u r r o t a n r e t l a

. Y R E T T A B I E L C H E V Y R E T T A B E L C H E V I T N E M T R A P M O C T N E M T R A P M O C R O T A R E P O T N E M T R A P M O C I O D A R I N O T U A C A 0 2 R O A 5 1 E S U F T E M M O R G E S U F E T O N E E S A 4 R O A 3

) D E R n h i t

(

E L B A C T E M M O R G E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I

) T O H Y R E T T A B D E R

/

(

I E L C H E V I H C T W S N O T N G I I I R E K A E P S E N O H P O R C M I C C A N O

/

I N O T N G I I I O D A R CONTROL HEAD T E M M O R G

) D N U O R G K L B

/

(

E L B A C R E W O P O D A R I y r a m l i i r p k c a b e h t a v n o i t c e n n o c s s s a h c i d o o g A i d n a n o i t a r e p o o d a r r o f l a i t n e s s e s i l e b a c r e w o p l i

. t i k e b a c d n a o d a r e h t o t e g a m a d t n e v e r p o t l

. e b a r i s e d s i e m a r f e c h e v e h i l t o t n o i t c e n n o C INTERFACE I O D A R r o t c e n n o c r a e R e i

. i

(

g n n n u r t o n s i n o i t i n g i s

'

r a c e h t i n e h w o d a r e h t f o e s u s s e c x e

, y r e t t a b s

'

r a c e h t o t y l t c e r i d e n i l I N O T N G I

'

I s o d a r i e h t t c e n n o c o t e s o o h c u o y f i

:

n o i t u a C

. F F O r o N O h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s

'

r a c e h t h t i w e t a r e p o o t o d a r e h t s w o i l l a n o i t a r u g i f n o c s h T i

. y r e t t a b s

'

r a c e h t f o e g r a h c s d w o s l i a n i t l u s e r l d u o c

:

E T O N t n u o M e t o m e R r o f m a r g a D i t c e n n o c r e t n I g n i l b a C 2 1

-

2 e r u g F i

. N O d e n r u t s i h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s

'

r a c e h t n e h w n o i t c n u f y n o l l i l i w o d a r e h t

, h c t i w s n o i t i n g i s

'

r a c e h t o t d e r i w s i e n i l I N O T N G I

'

i I s o d a r e h t f I Installation Details for Standard Configurations Ignition Sense Cable 2-11 2.4 Ignition Sense Cable Motorola supplies an ignition sense cable and recommends that it be used with every mobile installation. The ignition sense cable allows the radio to be turned on and off with the vehicle ignition switch, and allows the radio to remember the state of the radio on/off switch, even if it is changed while the vehicle is off. For radio ON/OFF control independent of the ignition switch, connect the red ignition cable (pin 25 of accessory connector) to battery hot at the vehicle fuse block (dash mount only). For radio ON/OFF control via the ignition switch, connect the red ignition cable to ignition at the fuse block. 2.5 The ignition sense cable uses either a 3-Amp (P/N 6500139764) or 4-Amp (P/N 6580283E02) fuse. For other considerations when connecting the ignition cable, see Basic Service Manuals in Related Publications on page 1-v. Antenna Installation IMPORTANT NOTE: To assure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, these antenna installation guidelines and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and take into account the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. NOTE: For mobile radios with rated power of 7 watts or less, the only installation restrictions are to use only Motorola approved antennas and install the antenna externally on metal body vehicles. For mobile radios with rated power greater than 7 Watts, always adhere to all the guidelines and restrictions in Section 2.5.1 below. 2.5.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle 1. External Installation - Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. 2. Roof Top - For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety Standards, mount the antenna in the center of the roof. 3. Trunk Lid - On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, the antennas of some radio models (see restrictions below) can also be mounted on the center area of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids (such as hatchback autos, sport utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna in the center of the roof. BEFORE INSTALLING AN ANTENNA ON THE TRUNK LID,

- Be sure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid will be at least 85 cm (33 inches) from the front surface of the rear seat-back to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards.

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis. NOTE: If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. 4. Mounting restrictions for certain radio models:

For all VHF and UHF models, the 1/4 wave antenna & RAD4227_ antenna should be mounted only in the center area of the roof, not on the trunk lid, to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards. 5. Ensure the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from the vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. 2-12 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 6. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. 7. Make sure the mobile radio antenna is installed at least 30 centimeters (1 foot) away from any other antenna on the vehicle. 8. For XPR Series Mobile Radio models with GPS using a GPS only or a combined RF/GPS antenna, ensure that the antenna has a clear view of the sky and that the antenna base with the GPS receiver is not covered by any metallic or radio frequency absorbing material. Any non-glass-mount GPS antenna should be positioned next to the RF antenna. Any other mobile radio antenna should be at least 30 centimeters (1 foot) away from the RF antenna. NOTE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other (such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, etc.) in close proximity to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. 2.5.2 Antenna Installation Procedure 1. Mount the antenna according to the instructions provided with the antenna kit. Run the coaxial cable to the radio mounting location. If necessary, cut off the excess cable and install the cable connector. 2. Connect the antenna cable connector to the radio antenna connector on the rear of the radio. In case of a GPS model, connect the GPS antenna to the GPS antenna connector on the rear 3. of the radio. Antenna Connector GPS-Antenna Connector Figure 2-13 Antenna connections on the back of the radio Installation Details for Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-13 2.5.3 Antenna Connection To ensure a secure connection of an antenna cable's mini-UHF plug to a radio's mini-UHF jack, their interlocking features must be properly engaged. If they are not properly engaged, the system will loosen. NOTE: Applying excessive force with a tool can cause damage to the antenna or the connector (e.g., stripping threads, deforming the collar or connector, or causing the connector to twist in the housing opening and break). Motorola recommends the following sequence to ensure proper attachment of the system (see Figure 2-14):

Mini UHF Jack Collar Pulled Back to Flange Flange Cable Figure 2-14 Mini-UHF Connection 1. Make sure that there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. 2. Make sure that the collar of the antenna cable plug is loose and does not bind. 3. Slide the collar back against the flange. Insert the antenna cable plugs pin fully into the radio jack, but do not engage the threads. 4. Ensure that the plugs and jacks interlocking features are fully seated. Check this by grasping the crimp on the cable jack, rotating the cable, and noting any movement. If the features are seated correctly, there should be NO movement. 5. Finger-tighten the antenna cable plugs collar onto the radios jack. 6. Give a final tug, by hand, to the collar, and retighten by hand as firmly as possible. 7. Use the rubber-coated pliers to grip the plugs knurled collar, then turn clockwise to tighten the collar. It should take 1/4 turn or less. Turning counterclockwise loosens the collar. NOTE: Overtightening the collar can damage the connector and the radio. 2-14 Installation Details for Standard Configurations 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6.1 Standard Hang-Up Clip The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator(s). Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, the microphone can be mounted in any position. The microphone hang-up clip must be grounded. Use the hang-up clip as a template to locate the mounting holes. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw in the top clip hole. Completing the Installation Complete the installation by connecting the power wires and plugging in the microphone cable to the mobile. 2.7 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Completing the Installation 2-15 Notes 2-16 Installation Details for Standard Configurations Completing the Installation Chapter 3 Options and Accessories Installation 3.1 Accessory Installation The accessories must be installed through the rear accessory connector that is located on the rear of the radio, adjacent to the power connector. Most of the Motorola-approved accessories are supplied with female terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire specifically designed to fit the plug of the rear accessory connector. Insert the female terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate locations. The accessory connector assembly is provided together with the accessory. Connect the accessory connector assembly to the rear accessory connector on the back of the mobile. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals can cause electrical intermittences and may cause damage to the plug. Rear Accessory Connector Figure 3-1 Location of the Rear Accessory Connector 3-2 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation Table 3-1 Rear Accessory Connector Pin Functions Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Pin Name Pin Function USB+

USB-

VBUS USB/MAP_ID GND MAP_ID_2 MAP_ID_1 SW B+

PWRGND SPKR-

SPKR+

Tx Audio Audio GND USB + (Data) USB - (Data) USB Power (5V from USB accessory/cable) USB/MAP_ID Ground Accessory Identifier Accessory Identifier Switched Battery Voltage Ground Speaker - (3.2 ohm minimum impedance) Speaker + (3.2 ohm minimum impedance) Rear External Microphone Input4 Audio Ground AUX Audio 1 PUBLIC Address 1 Pin No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Pin Name Rx Audio AUX Audio 2 GND Pin Function Receive Live Audio2 PUBLIC Address 2 Ground GP5-1 (PTT) 5V Level GPIO, PTT Input1 GND Ground GP5-2 (Monitor) 5V Level GPIO, Monitor Input3 GP5-6 GP5-3 GP5-7 5V Level GPIO 5V Level GPIO, Channel Activity Function 5V Level GPIO EMERGENCY Emergency Switch Input GP5-8 IGN SENSE VIP-1 5V Level GPIO Ignition Sense5 12V Tolerant, 5V GPIO, External Alarm 1 Pulling this line to ground will activate PTT function, activating the AUX_MIC input. 2 Fixed level (independent of volume level) received audio signal, including alert tones. Flat or de-emphasis are programmed by CPS. Output voltage is approximately 330 mVrms per 1kHz of deviation. 3 This input is used to detect when a rear microphone accessory is taken off-hook, to override PL to alert the user to busy traffic prior to transmitting. 4 This microphone signal is independent of the microphone signal on the front microphone connector. The nominal input level is 80mVrms for 60% deviation. The DC impedance is 660 ohms and the AC impedance is 560 ohms. 5 See Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-12 for wiring information. d n u o r G D _ P A M I

/

B S U 4

-

D 2 d n u o r G r e w o P 8 I 1 _ D _ P A M 6

+

r k p S 10 d n u o r G o d u A i i o d u A x R d n u o r G d n u o r G 6 _ 5 P G 7 _ 5 P G 12 14 16 18 20 22

) m r a A l t x E

(

1 _ P V I 26 8 _ 5 P G 24 1 3 5 7 9

+

D s u b V

+

B W S

-

r k p S I 2 _ D _ P A M 11 i o d u A x T 13 D x R

/

1 t i u O o d u A x u A 15 D x T

/

2 t i u O o d u A x u A 17 19 21 23 25 w S g r e m E e s n e S n g I

) T T P

(

1 _ 5 P G

) r o t i n o M

(

2 _ 5 P G

) t c A n a h C

(

3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-2 Pin Configuration of Rear Accessory Connector (as viewed from the rear of the radio) Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3-3 3.1.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the emergency pushbutton (Motorola part number RLN5926A_) or the footswitch (Motorola part number RLN5929A_) using the hardware that comes with the kit. Press the terminal into the accessory connector housing. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 23 and 18 (see Figure 3-3). Route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. SPST NORMALLY OPEN EMERGENCY SWITCH NOTE 1 PIN 23 PIN 18 ACCESSORY CONNECTOR d n u o r G r e w o P 8 I 1 _ D _ P A M 6

+

r k p S 10 d n u o r G o d u A i i o d u A x R d n u o r G d n u o r G 6 _ 5 P G 7 _ 5 P G 12 14 16 18 20 22

) m r a A l t x E

(

1 _ P V I 26 8 _ 5 P G 24 d n u o r G D _ P A M I

/

B S U 4

-

D 2 1 3 5 7 9

+

D s u b V

+

B W S

-

r k p S I 2 _ D _ P A M 11 i o d u A x T 13 D x R

/

1 t i u O o d u A x u A 15 D x T

/

2 t i u O o d u A x u A 17 19 21 23 25 w S g r e m E e s n e S n g I

) T T P

(

1 _ 5 P G

) r o t i n o M

(

2 _ 5 P G

) t c A n a h C

(

3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-3 Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram 3-4 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3.1.2 Horn and Lights (External Alarm) Relay Allows the user to be alerted to an incoming call when away from the vehicle. The vehicle's horn or lights or both are used depending on which option is connected to the accessory port. When the radio receives a call alert or emergency alarm/call, there is a delay before activating the horn and/or lights. The delay is programmable using the Horn & Lights Delay Time feature in the CPS. Once activated, the Horn and/or Lights remain active depending on the option selected. The Horn & Lights feature can be toggled between ON or OFF, via a short or long programmable button press (Horn &

Lights On/Off) or Horn/Lights (Utilities Menu) feature. For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting (normally under the dash) and, referring to Figure 3-4, perform the following procedure:

1. Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires (female pins) into locations 26 and 18 of the connector. 2. Lights Relay Connect the relay across the headlamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires (female pins) into locations 26 and 18 of the accessory connector. Y

) m r a A l t x E

(

1 _ P V I 26 8 _ 5 P G 24 d n u o r G r e w o P 8 I 1 _ D _ P A M 6

+

r k p S 10 d n u o r G o d u A i i o d u A x R d n u o r G d n u o r G 6 _ 5 P G 7 _ 5 P G 12 14 16 18 20 22 d n u o r G D _ P A M I

/

B S U 4

-

D 2 1 3 5 7 9

+

D s u b V

+

B W S

-

r k p S I 2 _ D _ P A M 11 i o d u A x T 13 D x R

/

1 t i u O o d u A x u A 15 D x T

/

2 t i u O o d u A x u A 17 19 21 23 25 w S g r e m E e s n e S n g I

) T T P

(

1 _ 5 P G

) r o t i n o M

(

2 _ 5 P G

) t c A n a h C

(

3 _ 5 P G Figure 3-4 Horn and Lights Wiring Diagram Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation 3-5 3.1.3 External Speaker DO NOT ground the radio's speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output (dc voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit will result if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. C a u t i o n The external speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in a variety of ways. With the trunnion bracket, the external speaker can mount permanently on the dashboard or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the external speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the external speaker out of the way so that it will not be kicked or knocked around by the vehicle occupants. Mount the external speaker as follows:

1. Use the external speaker mounting bracket as a template to mark the mounting hole locations. 2. Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3. Attach the external speaker and fasten to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4. Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Be sure the wires are out of the way and will not be snagged and broken by the occupants of the vehicle. Dashboard Trunnion Bracket Firewall OR Figure 3-5 External Speaker Mounting 3-6 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Installation Notes Chapter 4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting In this section are Motorola recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues, including:

Radio circuit damage due to over voltage condition Radio/Accessories "lock up"

Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed Radio intermittently resets Alternator whine present when transmitting with engine running Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off 4.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing If it is required to turn the radio on and off via the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control heads on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch (usually in the vehicles fuse panel under accessory or radio). NOTE: Motorola recommends protecting or isolating the radios ignition sense input from voltage spikes in excess of +/- 40 VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (utility trucks, buses and etc.), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 msec). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode (i.e. MR2535) with a breakdown voltage of between 18 and 40 volts will suffice. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola parts, kit number HLN6325_. If it is required to have the radio power up only via the control heads on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. This will mean the ignition sense will always be ignored and a re-wiring will be necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. 4-2 4.2 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Take care to scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where the ground connection is to be made, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. Verify that the A+ lead (red) is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the ground lead (black) is connected to the vehicles chassis using as short of a length of wire as is practical. For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed (lights, flashers, computers siren/PA and etc.), use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Make sure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI) from interfering with the radio and/or accessories. Do not coil up any excess length of the A+ (red) lead. Doing this may cause a large transient voltage to be produced when there is a high current drain (e.g. during transmit). This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable, if possible. It may affect the radios receive performance. 4.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines Use a relay to isolate the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC) from the radios ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which will now be attached to the radios ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. This is intended to filter the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter will introduce a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes and etc.), these relay circuits should be isolated as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, diode suppression should be used across the relay contacts to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is to be used, make sure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+ point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 volts when all accessories/air-conditioner, etc. are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6V +/- 20%. Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting 4.4 Jump-Start the Vehicle 4-3 Do not jump-start vehicle with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. C a u t i o n The state of your radio prior to needing a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, Motorola recommends the following steps be taken before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. 1. Locate the ignition sense line and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. NOTE: These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line) use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal. 2. Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3. Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to insure that ignition sense and power lines do not interfere with any moving parts. 4. Proceed with the jump-start routine as described by your vehicle owners manual. 5. Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 4.5 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker 1. Refer to Section 2.1.2 for recommended methods of installation available for the mobile two-way radio, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. 2. Refer to Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. 4-4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Notes Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering A.1 Basic Ordering Information When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, the complete identification number should be included. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. See Related Publications on page 1-v for the radio basic service manuals which consists the parts list and part numbers for ordering. A.2 Motorola Online Motorola Online users can access our online catalog at:

https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com To register for online access, please call 1-800-422-4210 (for U.S. and Canada Service Centers only). International customers can obtain assistance by go to http://www.motorolasolutions.com , select your region > SUPPORT. A.3 Mail Orders A.4 Mail orders are only accepted by the U.S. Federal Government Markets Division (USFGMD):

Motorola Inc. 7031 Columbia Gateway Drive 3rd Floor - Order Processing Columbia, MD 21046 U.S.A. Telephone Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization*

(United States and Canada) 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM (Central Standard Time) Monday through Friday (Chicago, U.S.A.) 1-800-422-4210 1-847-538-8023 (United States and Canada) U.S. Federal Government Markets Division (USFGMD) 1-877-873-4668 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Eastern Standard Time) Replacement Parts Ordering Fax Orders A-2 A.5 Fax Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization*

(United States and Canada) 1-800-622-6210 1-847-576-3023 (International) USFGMD

(Federal Government Orders) 1-800-526-8641 (For Parts and Equipment Purchase Orders) A.6 Parts Identification Radio Products and Solutions Organization*

(United States and Canada) 1-800-422-4210 A.7 Product Customer Service Radio Products and Solutions Organization (United States and Canada) 1-800-927-2744

* The Radio Products and Solutions Organization (RPSO) was formerly known as the Radio Products Services Division (RPSD) and/or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD). Appendix B Motorola Service Centers B.1 Servicing Information If a unit requires further complete testing, knowledge and/or details of component level troubleshooting or service than is customarily performed at the basic level, please send the radio to a Motorola Service Center as listed below. B.2 Motorola Service Center 1220 Don Haskins Drive Suite A El Paso, TX 79936 Tel: 915-872-8200 B.3 Motorola Federal Technical Center 10105 Senate Drive Lanham, MD 20706 Tel: 1-800-969-6680 Fax: 1-800-784-4133 B.4 Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center Motorola Canada Ltd. 8133 Warden Avenue Markham, Ontario, L6G 1B3 Tel: 1-800-543-3222 Fax: 1-888-331-9872 or 1-905-948-5970 B-2 Motorola Service Centers Motorola Canadian Technical Logistics Center Notes Index Index A accessories installing antenna dash mount

........................................................3-1 cable, see Cables, antenna connection ...........................................................2-13 diagrams ..............................................................2-13 installing ...............................................................2-11 mounting ..............................................................2-11 B base stations .............................................................1-6 black lead ..................................................................2-8 C cables antenna .........................................................2-4, 2-13 connection .............................................................4-1 diagrams ...............................2-2, 2-3, 2-9, 2-10, 2-13 ignition .................................................................2-11 ignition sense .......................................................2-11 power .....................................................................2-8

............................................................1-5 configurations dash mount control head dash mount see also specific model names

............................................................1-5 control stations ..........................................................1-6 D dash mount accessories installations ........................................3-1 configuration ..........................................................1-5 installation .......................................................2-2, 2-3 radio dimensions ....................................................1-2 trunnion ..................................................................2-5 E emergency footswitch ................................................3-3 emergency pushbutton ..............................................3-3 F footswitch, emergency ...............................................3-3 H horn relay ..................................................................3-4 I ignition installation cable .................................................................... 2-11 examples ...............................................................2-1 J J2 pin configuration .............................................2-2, 2-3 L leads black ......................................................................2-8 light relay ...................................................................3-4 locking kit, installing ...................................................2-6 M microphone hang-up clip, standard .........................................2-14 S-hook ...................................................................2-5 mounting configurations ............................................2-4 dash ................................................................1-5, 2-5 O ordering replacement parts ...................................... A-1 P parts, ordering replacement pin

..................................... A-1 functions ................................................................3-2 removal tool

....................................................1-1, 2-1 pin configurations J2 ....................................................................2-2, 2-3 pushbutton, emergency .............................................3-3 R rear accessory jack, see J2 relays horn ........................................................................3-4

........................................................................3-4 light replacement parts, ordering ..................................... A-1 S speaker connecting ...........................................................2-14 mounting ................................................................3-5 T tools, required ............................................................2-1 trunnion Index-2 bracket for speaker ................................................ 3-5 dash mount ............................................................ 2-5 locking kit ............................................................... 2-6 mounting bracket

................................................... 2-5 orientation .............................................................. 2-4 transmission hump mounting ................................ 2-5 W wiring diagrams ......................................................... 2-2

 

 

PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL TWO-WAY RADIO MOTOTRBO XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e COLOR DISPLAY MOBILE USER GUIDE Contents Declaration of Conformity.......................14 Important Safety Information........16 Software Version............................17 Version logicielle........................... 18 Computer Software Copyrights....19 Getting Started...............................20 How to Use This Guide..................................20 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You.............................................20 Preparing Your Radio for Use.......22 Powering Up the Radio..................................22 Adjusting the Volume.....................................22 Identifying Radio Controls............24 Radio Controls...............................................24 Using the Volume/Channel Knob.................. 24 Non-Connect Plus Operations......25 Additional Radio Controls in Non-Connect Plus Mode.................................... 26 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button.................26 Programmable Buttons....................... 26 Assignable Radio Functions.....27 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions............................ 30 Accessing the Programmed Functions....................................... 30 C o n t e n t s 1 English Identifying Status Indicators................31 Display Icons............................31 Call Icons................................. 34 Advanced Menu Icons..............34 Mini Notice Icons......................35 Sent Item Icons

....................35 Bluetooth Device Icons............ 36 Job Tickets Icons..................... 36 LED Indicator........................... 36 Alert Tones...............................37 Indicator Tones........................ 38 Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital Mode................38

...............................39

..................................39

...................... 40 IP Site Connect Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus Making and Receiving Calls in Non-Connect Plus Mode.................................... 42 Selecting a Zone.................................42 Selecting a Channel............................42 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call...................................... 43 s t n e t n o C 2 English Receiving and Responding to a Group Call....................43 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

.............. 44 Receiving an All Call ............... 44 Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call

...........45 Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call

............... 46 Making a Radio Call............................47 Making a Group Call................ 48 Making a Private Call

...........49 Making an All Call ................... 50 Making a Selective Call

....... 50 Making a Phone Call................51 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button........52 Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key .....................................53 Stopping a Radio Call

.....................54 Talkaround..........................................55 Advanced Features in Non-

Connect Plus Mode............ 56 Radio Check....................................... 56 Sending a Radio Check........... 56 Remote Monitor.................................. 57 Initiating Remote Monitor......... 58 Stopping Remote Monitor........ 59 Scan Lists........................................... 59 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List............................. 59 Editing the Scan List................ 60 Scan....................................................62 Starting and Stopping Scan..... 62 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan....................................63 Deleting a Nuisance Channel...63 Restoring a Nuisance Channel...............................63 Vote Scan

.......................................64 Contact Settings..................................64 Making a Group Call from Contacts..............................65 Making a Private Call from Contacts

..........................66 Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key

..................................66 C o n t e n t s Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key

..................................67 Adding a New Contact............. 68 Setting a Default Contact

.....69 Call Indicator Settings.........................69 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert

.........................................69 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls

................................70 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Call

..................................71 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message............................. 71 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for 3 English Telemetry Status with Text..................................... 72 Assigning Ring Styles.............. 72 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume................................73 Call Log Features................................73 Viewing Recent Calls............... 73 Deleting a Call from a Call List...................................... 74 Viewing Details from a Call List...................................... 74 Call Alert Operation.............................75 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert...................... 75 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List......................... 75 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button..................................76 Emergency Operation.........................76 Receiving an Emergency Alarm...................................77 Responding to an Emergency Alarm............... 77 Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm............... 78 s t n e t n o C 4 English Sending an Emergency Alarm...................................78 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call.................... 79 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Reinitiating an Emergency

............................. 80 Mode................................... 82 Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm............... 82

..................83 Text Message Features Sending a Quick Text Message............................. 83 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button.......... 84 Accessing the Drafts Folder.....84 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages............................85 Managing Sent Text Messages............................86 Receiving a Text Message.......90 Managing Received Text Messages............................91 Job Tickets..........................................94 Accessing the Job Ticket Folder..................................95 Logging In and Out of the Remote Server....................96 Creating and Sending a Job Ticket.................................. 96 Responding to the Job Ticket...97 Deleting a Job Ticket................98

............................................99

........................ 100 Privacy Multi-Site Controls Starting an Automatic Site Search...............................100 Stopping an Automatic Site Search...............................101 Starting a Manual Site Search...............................102 Security.............................................103 Radio Disable.........................103 Radio Enable..........................104 Lone Worker..................................... 106 Bluetooth Operation..........................107 Turning Bluetooth On and Off..................................... 107 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device...............108 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode).........109 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device...............109 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device............................... 110 Viewing Device Details...........110 Deleting Device Name........... 110 Bluetooth Mic Gain.................111 Notification List..................................111 Accessing the Notification List.................................... 112 Auto-Range Transponder System

(ARTS)

.....................................112 Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP).. 112 Wi-Fi Operation.................................113 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........113 Connecting to a Network Access Point..................... 114 Refreshing the Network List...114 Adding a Network...................115 Viewing Details of Network Access Points................... 116 English C o n t e n t s 5 Removing Network Access Points................................ 116 Third Party Peripherals Connection Modes.......................................... 117 Utilities.............................................. 118 Setting the Squelch Level...... 118 Setting the Power Level......... 118 Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off..........119 Identifying Cable Type........... 119 Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off..............120 Turning the Radio Tones/

Alerts On or Off................. 121 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..........121 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off.................. 122 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off.................. 122 Setting the Text Message Alert Tone......................... 123 Changing the Display Mode...124 Adjusting the Display Brightness......................... 124 Language............................... 125 s t n e t n o C 6 English Turning Horns/Lights On or Off..................................... 126 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off........................... 126 Turning the Public Address System On or Off.............. 127 Turning the External Public Address System On or Off..................................... 127 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference........127 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off...............128 Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off.. 128 Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature..............................128 Call Forwarding

..................129 Menu Timer............................130 Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

A)...................................... 130 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 131 Intelligent Audio......................131 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off

..........132 Setting the Audio Ambience...133 Setting the Audio Profiles.......134 Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off..................................... 134 Flexible Receive List.............. 135 Accessing General Radio Information........................ 136 Keypad Microphone Features.............................140 Using the Keypad..............................140 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off................................. 141 Additional Advanced Features..........142 Selecting a Zone by Alias Search...............................142 Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial

...................143 Initiating a Remote Monitor by Manual Dial

.............. 144 Making a Private Call by Manual Dial

...................145 Making a Phone Call by Manual Dial

...................146 Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button Making a Group, Private or

........................... 147 All Call with the Programmable Number Key

................................149 Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button

................ 150 Making a Phone Call from Contacts

........................152 Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search

.......................... 154 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search. 156 Editing the Scan List.............. 157 Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List............................. 160 Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial

...................160 RSSI Values...........................161

............................ 161 Text Messaging C o n t e n t s 7 English Writing and Sending a Text Message........................... 162 Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox................... 163 Editing a Quick Reply Message........................... 164 Accessing the Drafts Folder...165 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages..........................166 Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF). 168 Security

.........................................168 Radio Disable via Manual Dial....................................168 Radio Enable via Manual Dial....................................169 Password Lock Features.................. 170 Accessing the Radio from Password.......................... 170 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State..................... 171 Turning the Password Lock On or Off........................... 171 Changing the Password.........172 Text Entry Configuration................... 173 Word Correct..........................173 Word Predict.......................... 174 Sentence Cap........................ 174 Viewing Custom Words..........175 Editing Custom Word............. 175 Adding Custom Words........... 176 Deleting a Custom Word........177 Deleting All Custom Words.... 178 Front Panel Configuration (FPC)...... 179 Entering FPC Mode................179 Editing FPC Mode Parameters....................... 179 Connect Plus Operations............180 Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode...... 181 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button...............181 Programmable Buttons..................... 181 Assignable Radio Functions...182 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions.......................... 183 Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode..................... 183 Display Icons..........................183 Call Icons............................... 185 s t n e t n o C 8 English Advanced Menu Icons............186 Sent Item Icons ..................... 186 Bluetooth Device Icons.......... 186 LED Indicator......................... 187 Indicator Tones...................... 188 Alert Tones.............................188 Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-Connect Plus Modes.....188 Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode...... 190 Selecting a Site.................................190 Roam Request....................... 190 Site Lock On/Off.....................190 Site Restriction.......................190 Selecting a Zone...............................191 Using Multiple Networks................... 191 Selecting a Call Type........................192 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call.................................... 192 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call..................192 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call.................193 Receiving a Site All Call.........193 Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call............ 194 Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call....... 195 Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call....................................195 Making a Radio Call..........................196 Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob..... 196 Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button......198 Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button........................ 199 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button........................ 199 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu................................. 200 Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts. 201 Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call............ 202 C o n t e n t s 9 English Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call....................................202 Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call............ 203 Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode.......... 204 Auto Fallback.................................... 204 Indications of Auto Fallback Mode................................. 204 Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode...................204 Returning to Normal Operation.......................... 205 Radio Check..................................... 205 Sending a Radio Check......... 206 Remote Monitor................................ 206 Initiating Remote Monitor....... 207 Scan..................................................208 Starting and Stopping Scan... 208 s t n e t n o C 10 English Responding to a Transmission During a Scan..................................208 User Configurable Scan....................209 Turning Scan On or Off.....................209 Editing the Scan List......................... 210 Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu............................211 Understanding Scan Operation.........213 Scan Talkback.................................. 214 Contacts Settings..............................214 Making a Private Call from Contacts............................215 Making a Call Alias Search.... 215 Adding a New Contact........... 216 Call Indicator Settings.......................217 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert .217 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls.................................. 217 Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message........................... 218 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume..............................218 Call Log Features..............................219 Viewing Recent Calls............. 219 Deleting a Call from a Call List.................................... 219 Viewing Details from a Call List.................................... 220 Call Alert Operation...........................220 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert.................... 220 Making a Call Alert from the Contact List....................... 221 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button................................221 Emergency Operation.......................222 Receiving an Incoming Emergency........................224 Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List.... 224 Deleting the Emergency Details............................... 224 Responding to an Emergency Call.................225 Responding to an Emergency Alert............... 225 Initiating an Emergency Call.. 226 Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow.......... 226 Initiating an Emergency Alert. 227 Exiting Emergency Mode....... 227 Text Message Features.................... 228 Sending a Quick Text Message........................... 228 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button........ 229 Accessing the Drafts Folder...229 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages..........................231 Managing Sent Text Messages..........................232 Receiving a Text Message.....235 Reading a Text Message....... 236 Managing Received Text Messages..........................236 Privacy.............................................. 239 Making a Privacy-Enabled

(Scrambled) Call............... 240 Security.............................................240 Radio Disable.........................241 Radio Enable..........................242 Bluetooth Operation..........................243 Turning Bluetooth On and Off..................................... 244 C o n t e n t s 11 English Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device...............245 Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode).........246 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device...............246 Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device............................... 247 Viewing Device Details...........247 Deleting Device Name........... 247 Bluetooth Mic Gain.................248 Notification List..................................248 Accessing the Notification List.................................... 249 Wi-Fi Operation.................................249 Turning Wi-Fi On or Off..........249 Connecting to a Network Access Point..................... 250 Refreshing the Network List...250 Adding a Network...................251 Viewing Details of Network Access Points................... 252 Removing Network Access Points................................ 252 Utilities.............................................. 253 Turning the Radio Tones/

Alerts On or Off................. 253 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level..........254 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off.................. 254 Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off.................. 255 Setting the Power Level......... 255 Changing the Display Mode...256 Adjusting the Display Brightness......................... 257 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off...............257 Language............................... 258 Turning the LED Indicator On or Off........................... 258 Identifying Cable Type........... 259 Voice Announcement.............259 Menu Timer............................260 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off..................................... 260 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference........261 Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-

D)...................................... 261 s t n e t n o C 12 English Intelligent Audio......................262 Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off..............263 Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off..................................... 264 Accessing General Radio Information........................ 265 Accessories..................................276 Authorized Accessories List..................................... 277 Antennas...........................................277 Audio.................................................279 Cables...............................................280 Desktop Accessories........................ 280 Mounting Kits.................................... 281 Speakers...........................................281 Miscellaneous Accessories...............281 Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range...............................282 Special Channel Assignments.....................282 Emergency Channel......................... 282 Non-Commercial Call Channel......... 282 Operating Frequency Requirements............282 Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies............285 Technical Parameters for Interfacing C o n t e n t s External Data Sources............................285 Limited Warranty....................................286 MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS........................................... 286 I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:......................... 286 II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:....................... 287 III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:............................287 IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:.287 V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:..................................................288 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:........................................ 288 VII. GOVERNING LAW:...............................290 13 English Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: XPR 5550/XPR 5580/XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) y t i f m r o n o C f o n o i t a r a c e D l 14 English Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-

stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. D e c a r a l t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y 15 English D c a r a l t i o n d e c o n f o r m i t Appareil numrique de Classe B En tant que priphrique d'ordinateur personnel, cet appareil est conforme aux stipulations de la partie 15 des r-

glements de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Son utilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes :

1 Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interfrence nuisible. 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonction-

nement indsirable. Remarque Ce matriel a fait l'objet de tests et a t dclar conforme aux limites tablies pour un appareil numrique de classe B, comme il est stipul la section 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont fixes afin d'offrir une protection suffisante contre des interfrences nuisibles dans une installation rsidentielle. Ce matriel gnre, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install ni utilis confor-

mment aux instructions, il peut provoquer un brouillage nuisible aux communications radio. Cependant, on ne peut garantir qu'il n'y aura aucune interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si cet appareil cause une interfrence nuisible de la rception de la radio ou de la tlvision, ce qui peut tre dtermin en teignant et en allumant l'appareil, vous tes encourag remdier la situation en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou dplacer l'antenne rceptrice. Augmenter la distance entre l'quipement et le rcepteur. Brancher l'appareil dans une autre prise sur un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. Consulter un revendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision chevronn pour obtenir de l'aide. Franais

(Canada) and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. This radio transmitter has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with Motorola-approved antenna with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Important Safety Information RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to Occupational use only. Before using the radio, read the RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for Compliance with applicable standards and Regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com Any modification to this device, not expressly authorized by Motorola, may void the users authority to operate this device. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type n o i t a m r o n f I y t e f a S t n a t r o p m I 16 English antenne dont le type et le gain maximal (ou minimal) sont approuvs par Industrie Canada pour cet metteur. Afin de limiter les interfrences radio pour les autres utilisateurs, le type et le gain de l'antenne doivent tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas plus forte qu'il ne le faut pour tablir la communication. Cet metteur radio a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour utilisation avec une antenne approuve par Motorola offrant le gain maximal autoris et l'impdance requise pour le type d'antenne indiqu. Il est strictement interdit d'utiliser avec cet appareil tout type d'antenne ne figurant pas dans cette liste et prsentant un gain suprieur au maximum indiqu pour le type. Consignes de scurit importantes Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit ATTENTION!

Cette radio ne doit tre utilise qu' des fins professionnelles. Avant d'utiliser la radio, lisez le guide Radios bidirectionnelles mobiles : exposition aux radiofrquences et scurit du produit, qui contient d'importantes instructions de fonctionnement pour une utilisation scuritaire et des informations sur l'exposition aux frquences radiolectriques, dans le but dassurer votre conformit aux normes et rglements en vigueur. Visitez le site Web suivant pour obtenir la liste des antennes et des autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com Toute modification effectue cet appareil sans l'autorisation explicite de Motorola peut annuler l'autorisation d'utiliser cet appareil. Selon la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, cet metteur radio ne peut tre utilis qu'avec une s e t n a t r o p m i t i r u c s e d s e n g s n o C i 2 English Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the software version R02.50.00 or later. See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version on page 137 to determine the software version of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. S o f t w a r e V e r s o n i 17 English Version logicielle Toutes les fonctions dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version R02.50.00 ou les versions ultrieures du logiciel de la radio. Consultez la section Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version on page 137 pour connatre la version logicielle de votre radio. Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements propos des fonctions prises en charge, adressez-vous votre dtaillant ou votre administrateur de systme. e l l i i e c g o l n o s r e V i 18 English Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-

exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. The AMBE+2 voice coding Technology embodied in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use within this Communications Equipment. The user of this Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a human-readable form. U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,

#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,

#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,

#5,226,084 and #5,195,166. C o m p u t e r S o f t w a r e C o p y r i g h t s 19 English Getting Started How to Use This Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the MOTOTRBO Mobiles. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Throughout this publication, the icons described next are used to indicate features supported in either the conventional Analog mode or conventional Digital mode:

Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-

Only feature. Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-

Only feature. For features that are available in both conventional Analog and Digital modes, no icon is shown. Conventional Analog Mode-Only features are not available in Connect Plus mode of operation. See Connect Plus Operations on page 180 for more information. For features that are available in a conventional multi-

site mode, see IP Site Connect on page 39 for more information. Selected features are also available on the single-site trunking mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on page 39 for more information. Selected features are also available in the multi-site trunking mode, Linked Capacity Plus. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 40 for more information. What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 20 English What are the best radio usage practices for effective communication?

What maintenance procedures will help promote longer radio life?

G e t t i n g S a r t t e d 21 English Preparing Your Radio for Use Powering Up the Radio Turn off the radio by pressing and holding the On/Off Button until you see Powering Down on the display of the radio. Note:

Your radio may take up to 7 seconds to completely turn off. Adjusting the Volume

) briefly. You see Press the On/Off Button (

MOTOTRBO (TM) on the display of the radio momentarily, followed by a welcome message or welcome image. The green LED and the Home screen lights up. A brief tone sounds, indicating that the power up test is successful. Note:

There is no power up tone if the radio tones/

alerts function is disabled (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 121). If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer.

) clockwise. Increase the volume by turning the Volume/Channel Knob (

Decrease the volume by turning this knob counterclockwise. Note:

Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum volume offset where the volume level cannot be lowered past the programmed e s U r o f i o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 22 English AP1A minimum volume. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o i f o r U s e 23 English Identifying Radio Controls Radio Controls 8 Front Programmable Buttons[1]

9 Accessory Connector 10 LED Indicators Using the Volume/Channel Knob The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed as dual purpose for both volume and channel or as a volume-only control. To adjust the volume, see Adjusting the Volume on page 22. To change channels, push and hold the knob until channel selection screen is displayed, then turn the knob to the required channel. To exit the channel selection state, do one of the following:

Push the Volume/Channel Knob again. Press

. Press

. Wait for the menu timer to expire. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d I i 1 On/Off/Information Button 2 Volume/Channel Knob 3 Display 4 Menu/OK Button 5 Scroll Up/Down Buttons 6 Speaker 7 Return/Home Button 24 1 These buttons are programmable. English 12346591078 Non-Connect Plus Operations N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s O p e r a t i o n s 25 English Additional Radio Controls in Non-

Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio (

two basic purposes:

) serves While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 47). If the Talk Permit Tone or the PTT Sidetone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. You will also hear a continuous talk prohibit tone, if your call is interrupted, indicating that you should release the PTT button, for example when the radio receives an Emergency Call. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

Short press Pressing and releasing rapidly. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 26 English A Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Press and hold Keeping the button pressed. Call Forwarding Note:

The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 76 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. Assignable Radio Functions Audio Ambience Audio Profiles Bluetooth Audio Switch Call Alert Allows the user to select an environment the radio is operating in. Allows the user to select the preferred audio profile. Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to select a Call Log Contacts Emergency Ext PA On/Off Intelligent Audio Manual Dial contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent. Toggles Call Forwarding on or off. Selects the call log list. Provides direct access to the Contacts list. Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Toggles the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the radios internal public address (PA) system. Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 27 English Manual Site Roam[2]

Mic AGC On/Off Monitor Notifications Nuisance Channel Delete[2]

Starts the manual site search. Toggles the internal microphone automatic gain control (AGC) on or off. Monitors a selected channel for activity. Provides direct access to the Notifications list. Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the selected zone or channel combination of the user from which scan is initiated. One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private, Phone or Group Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 28 English Option Board Feature PA On/Off Permanent Monitor Phone Radio Enable Radio Disable Toggles option board feature(s) on or off for option board-enabled channels. Toggles the radios internal public address (PA) system on or off. Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Provides direct access to the Phone Contacts list. Toggles privacy on or off. Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Privacy Radio Alias and ID Provides radio alias and ID. Radio Check Remote Monitor Scan[2]

Site Info Repeater/

Talkaround[2]

Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Toggles scan on or off. Displays current Linked Capacity Plus site name and ID. Plays site announcement voice messages for the current site (this function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled). Site Lock On/Off[2] When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Telemetry Control Controls the Output Pin on a Text Message local or remote radio. Selects the text message menu. Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey Trill Enhancement On/Off Voice Announcement for Channel Voice Announcement On/Off Voice Operating Transmission

(VOX) Zone Stops the transmission of a remote monitored radio without giving any indicators, or an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel. Toggles trill enhancement on or off. Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Toggles VOX on or off. Allows selection from a list of zones. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 29 English Assignable Settings or Utility Functions Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:

All Tones/

Alerts Backlight Channel Up/

Down Display Mode Power Level Squelch Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Toggles display backlight on or off. Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Toggles squelch level between tight and normal. Accessing the Programmed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. 2 Not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 30 English 1 Press appropriate Menu Scroll button (

access the menu functions. to access the menu. Press the or

) to 2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press the button. 3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the button. Long previous screen, press the press the screen. button to return to the Home Note:

The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad microphone (see Keypad Microphone Features on page 140). Note:

Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period of inactivity and returns to your Home screen. Identifying Status Indicators Display Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Icons are displayed on the status bar, arranged left-most in order of appearance/usage and are channel specific. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Monitor Selected channel is being monitored. Bluetooth The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device con-

nected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Sign In Radio is signed in to the remote server. Sign Out Radio is signed out of the remote server. Job Ticket Notification Notification List has items to review. Power Level or A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 31 English Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. Over-the-Air Programming Delay Tim-

er Indicates time left before automatic re-

start of radio. GPS/GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-

able. GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. Scan[3][4]

Scan feature is enabled. Scan- Priority 1[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 1. Scan- Priority 2[3][4]

Radio detects activity on channel/group designated as Priority 2. Vote Scan Vote scan feature is enabled. Flexible Receive List Flexible receive list is enabled. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 32 English Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good[5]

Wi-Fi signal is good. Wi-Fi Average[5]

Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor[5]

Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable[5]

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Site Roaming[3]

The site roaming feature is enabled. Talkaround[3][4]

In the absence of a repeater, radio is currently configured for direct radio to ra-

dio communication. Wi-Fi Excellent[5]

3 Not applicable in Capacity Plus 4 Not applicable in Linked Capacity Plus 5 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 33 English Call Icons The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Group Call/All Call Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a group alias (name) or ID

(number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a phone alias (name) or ID

(number). Phone Call as Group/All Call Indicates a Phone Call as Group/All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name) or ID

(number). Bluetooth PC Call Indicates a Bluetooth PC Call in prog-

ress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a Bluetooth PC Call alias (name) or ID

(number). Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 34 English Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Mini Notice Icons The following icons appear momentarily on the radios display after an action to perform task is taken. Successful Transmission (Posi-

tive) Successful action taken. Failed Transmission (Negative) Failed action taken. Transmission in Progress (Transi-

tional) Transmitting. This is seen before indi-

cation for Successful Transmission or Failed Transmission. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. A d d i t i o n a l OR OR OR Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. Send Failed The text message has not been sent. i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t In-Progress The text message to a group alias or ID is pending transmission. The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is pending transmission, followed by waiting for acknowledgement. l P u s M o d e 35 English New Jobs Indicates new jobs. LED Indicator The LED indicator (

your radio.

) shows the operational status of Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). Job Tickets Icons All Jobs Indicates all jobs listed. Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving or sending an emergency transmission, has failed the self-test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is configured with Auto-Range Transponder System. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 36 English A Solid yellow Blinking yellow Double blinking yellow Radio is monitoring a conventional channel or in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio is scanning for activity or receiving a Call Alert, flexible receive list is enabled or all local Linked Capacity Plus channels are busy. Radio is no longer connected to the repeater while in Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus; all Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus channels are currently busy. Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Blinking green Radio is powering up, receiving a non-

privacy-enabled call or data, or detecting activity, or retrieving Over-

the-Air Programming transmissions over the air. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call or data. Double blinking green Note:

While in conventional mode, when the LED blinks green, it indicates the radio detects activity over the air. Due to the nature of the digital protocol, this activity may or may not affect the radio's programmed channel. For Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus, there is no LED indication when the radio is detecting activity over the air. Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone Periodic Tone Repetitive Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously un-

til termination. Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that re-

peats itself until it is ter-

minated by the user. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 37 English Momentary Tone Sounds only once for a short period of time de-

fined by the radio. Indicator Tones High pitched tone Low pitched tone Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital Mode Each channel in your radio can be configured as a conventional analog or conventional digital channel. To switch between an analog or a digital channel, use the Scroll Up/Down (

Volume/Channel Knob (

Programmed Channel Up or Channel Down

) buttons.

). buttons. When switching from digital to analog mode, certain features are unavailable. Icons for the digital features

(such as Messages) reflect this change by appearing grayed out. Disabled features are hidden in the menu. Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital mode. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Note:

Your radio also switches between digital and analog modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on page 62). To use the Scroll Up/Down buttons, while in the Home Screen of the required Zone, press to select the required channel. or e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 38 English AB To use the programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons, while in the Home Screen of the required Zone, press Channel Up or Channel Down to select the required channel. IP Site Connect This feature allows your radio to extend conventional communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Note:

Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam enabled, not both at the same time. Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches the channel(s) in the roam list during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. A roam list supports a maximum of 16 channels

(including the Selected Channel). Note:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Capacity Plus Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of programmed channels while in Repeater Mode. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 39 English You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Your radio also has features that are available in conventional digital mode, IP Site Connect, Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. However, the minor differences in the way each feature works does not affect the performance of your radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. Linked Capacity Plus Linked Capacity Plus is a multi-site multi-channel trunking configuration of the MOTOTRBO radio system, combining the best of both Capacity Plus and IP Site Connect configurations. Linked Capacity Plus allows your radio to extend trunking communication beyond the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available sites which are connected via an Internet Protocol (IP) network. It also provides an increase in capacity by efficiently utilizing the combined available number of programmed channels supported by each of the available sites. When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the range of another, it connects to the new site's repeater to send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your settings, this is done automatically or manually. If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. It then locks on to the repeater with the strongest Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value. In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have the strongest signal) and locks on to it. Any channel with Linked Capacity Plus enabled can be added to a particular roam list. The radio searches these channels during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site. Note:

You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the roam list. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 40 English Similar to Capacity Plus, icons of features not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus are not available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you try to access a feature not applicable to Linked Capacity Plus via a programmable button press. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on this configuration. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 41 English Making and Receiving Calls in Non-

Connect Plus Mode 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 99 channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 99 channels per zone. 3 1 Access the Zone feature. Steps Radio Con-

trols Programmed Zone button Radio menu Press the programmed Zone button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. or or and scroll to the required zone. to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. Selecting a Channel Transmissions are sent and received on a channel. Depending on your radios configuration, each channel may have been programmed differently to support different groups of users or supplied with different features. Select a channel by using:

Scroll Up or Scroll Down buttons. Volume/Channel Knob. The programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 42 English Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID, or group ID is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. Note:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). See Privacy on page 99 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 43 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i The PTT Sidetone 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note:

See Making a Group Call on page 48 for details on making a Group Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. 44 English If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and free the channel for you to talk/respond. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. See Making a Private Call on page 49 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving an All Call An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the channel. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. When you receive an All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. An All Call does not wait for a predetermined time before ending. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. You cannot respond to an All Call. Note:

See Making an All Call on page 50 for details on making an All Call. Note:

The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During an All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analog system. When you receive a Selective Call, the LED blinks green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias or Selective Call or Alert with Call. The first text line shows the Private Call icon. The radio displays Selective Call or Alert with Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 49 for details on making a Private Call. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 45 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i Receiving and Responding to a Phone Call Note:

If Phone Call capability is enabled, you are able to respond to a Phone Call. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Phone Call as Private Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Private Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows the caller alias or Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the first line of the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. 46 English If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Phone Call as Group Call When you receive a Phone Call as a Group Call, the Phone Group Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows the group alias and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step to end the call. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat this step to end the call. Phone Call as All Call When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, the Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner; the display shows All Call and Phone Call. If Phone Call capability is not enabled on your radio, the display shows Unavailable and your radio mutes the call. Your radio returns to the previous screen when the call ends. Note:

When you receive a Phone Call as an All Call, you can respond to the call or end the call, only if an All Call type is assigned to the channel. 1 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. 2 to end the call. Press The display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows All Call and Call Ended. Making a Radio Call After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Group or Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The programmed number keys This method is for Group, Private and All Calls only and is used with the keypad (see Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 53). The Contacts list (see Contact Settings on page 64). Manual Dial This method is for Private and Phone Calls only and is dialed using the keypad

(see Making a Private Call by Manual Dial on page M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 47 English 145, and Making a Phone Call by Manual Dial on page 146). Note:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-

enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note:

See Privacy on page 99 for more information. Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:

You can also make a Group Call via Contacts

(see Making a Group Call from Contacts on page 65). e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 48 English Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. There are two types of Private Calls. The first type, where a radio presence check is performed prior to setting up the call, while the other sets up the call immediately. Only one of these call types can be programmed to your radio by your dealer. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the Menu, One Touch Access button, the programmed number keys, or the Volume/Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an individual radio. See Text Message Features on page 83 or Call Alert Operation on page 75 for more information. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 49 English If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. You can also make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making a Private Call from Contacts on page 66). Making an All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the channel. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active All Call group alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows All Call. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone Making a Selective Call Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or respond to a Selective Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call. 1 Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Channel on page 42. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 50 English 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Making a Phone Call 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Phone Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows Access Code:. Enter the access code and press to proceed. The LED lights up solid green. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If the call-setup is successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If the call-setup is unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, enter the extra digits using the keypad and press to proceed. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 51 English The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the radio returns to the previous screen. to end the call. Press If de-access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the display shows De-Access Code:. Do one of the following. Enter the de-access code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. Press the One Touch Access button. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to The DTMF tone sounds with each keypad press, and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If the end-call-setup is successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the end-call-setup is unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat Step 4 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Note:

When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to During channel access, press dismiss the call attempt. A tone sounds to indicate success. During the call, if you press the One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note:

Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. 4 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 52 English The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a keypad. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. 1 Long press the programmed number key, when you are on the Home screen, to make a Group, Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds. l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 53 English e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on page 66 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on the keypad. Stopping a Radio Call This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or Private Call to free the channel for transmission. For example, when a radio experiences a stuck microphone condition where the PTT button is inadvertently pressed by the user. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button, while on the relevant channel. The display shows Remote Dekey. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Success, indicating that the channel is now free. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows Remote Dekey Failed. 54 English 2 3 4 5 Talkaround You can continue to communicate when your repeater is not operating, or when your radio is out of the repeaters range but within talking range of other radios. This is called talkaround. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. The Talkaround setting is retained even after powering down. You can toggle between talkaround and repeater modes by pressing the programmed Repeater/

Talkaround button or using the radio menu as described next. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. 1 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to M a k n g i to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Talkaround and press to to enable/disable the Talkaround. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 55 English Advanced Features in Non-Connect Plus Mode Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Ra-

dio Check button 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English Radio Control Menu Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID:

Select the subscriber alias or ID directly. or to the re-

quired subscriber alias or ID and press to select. Use the Manual Dial menu. or to Manual Dial and press lect. to se-

Radio Control Steps The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. or to Radio 2 Wait for acknowledgement. to Number and press select. If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Else, the first line of the display shows Radio Number:; the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the key-

pad to edit/enter the ID, and press to select. 4 5 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. or to Radio Check and press to select. button is pressed when the radio is If the waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. If Radio Check is successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If Radio Check is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 57 English Radio Control Steps 3 4 or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. or and press to Remote Mon. to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. to select. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. to access the menu or to Contacts and press to select If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Initiating Remote Monitor 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press Steps Radio Control Program-

med Re-

mote Mon-

itor Button Menu 2 1 2 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows negative mini notice. Stopping Remote Monitor Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio. Follow the steps below to manually stop Remote Monitor. 1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey button. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/

group. Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of 16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both analog and digital entries. You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list. You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front Panel Programming. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List 1 2 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 59 English 3 4 or select. to Scan List and press to or to view each member on the Use list. The Priority icon appears left of the members alias, if set, to indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2 channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2 channels in a scan list. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. Editing the Scan List Adding a New Entry to the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English 4 5 6 7 or select. to Add Member and press to or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice, followed immediately by Add Another?. 8 Do one of the following:

or or to Yes and press and repeat Steps 5 to 7. to No and press the current list. to select, to save Deleting an Entry from the Scan List 1 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan List 2 3 4 5 6 or select. to Scan List and press to or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or select. to Delete and press to 7 Do one of the following:

or or to Yes and press to delete entry. The display shows positive mini notice. to No and press to return to the previous screen. 8 Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to delete other entries. After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press to return to the Home screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to or to the required alias or ID. Press to select. or to select. to Edit Priority and press or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 61 English Note:

The Priority icon appears left of the name of the member. There is no Priority icon if priority is set to None. Scan When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice activity. The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears on the status bar. During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of the call. This is also true for the reverse. There are two ways of initiating scan:

Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans all the channels/groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your radio may (depending on the settings) automatically start on the last scanned active channel/group or on the channel where scan was initiated. Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically starts scanning when you select a channel/group that has Auto Scan enabled. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus. Starting and Stopping Scan 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan State and press to to required scan state and press or to select. The display shows Scan On when Scan is enabled. The LED blinks yellow and the scan icon appears. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English The display shows Scan Off if Scan is disabled. The LED turns off and the scan icon disappears. Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group where activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a programmed time period known as hang time. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other channels/groups. Deleting a Nuisance Channel If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise (termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the Selected Channel. Deleting a nuisance channel is only possible through the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is not accessible through the menu. 1 When your radio locks on to an unwanted or nuisance channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button until you hear a tone. 2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button. The nuisance channel is deleted. Restoring a Nuisance Channel To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and then power it on again. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 63 English Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan Change the channel via the Channel Up/Down button or menu. buttons. Vote Scan Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where there are multiple base stations transmitting identical information on different analog channels. Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and performs a voting process to select the strongest received signal. Once that is established, your radio unmutes to transmissions from that base station. The LED blinks yellow and the vote scan icon appears on the status bar. To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan, follow the same procedures as Responding to a Transmission During a Scan on page 63. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Contact Settings Contacts provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each entry, depending on context, associates with one of five types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call or Dispatch Call. PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only available with the applications. Refer to the data applications documentation for more information. Note:

If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private Call, and All Call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. See Privacy on page 99 for more information. Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a quick dial on the entry. Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analog contacts and one for Digital contacts, with a maximum of 500 members for Analog and 1000 for Digital on each Contacts list respectively. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Type Call Alias Call ID Note:

You can add or edit subscriber IDs for the Digital Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view the subscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate a Call Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can only be performed by your dealer. Making a Group Call from Contacts 1 to access the menu. 2 3 or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required group alias or ID. 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When any user in the group responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and the users ID on your display. 7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 65 English Making a Private Call from Contacts 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. 8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. 1 2 Note:

See Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key on page 53 for details on making a Group, Private or All Call with the programmed number key(s). to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English 3 4 5 to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or select. to Program Key and press to or to the desired number key and to select. press If the number key is currently assigned to another entry, the display shows The Key is Already Assigned and then, the first line of the display shows Overwrite?. Do one of the following. to Yes and press to overwrite the number key assignment. to No and press to return to the previous step. Each entry can be associated to different number before each number key that is keys. You see a assigned to an entry. If the is before Empty, that number key is not assigned. or or If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular mode, this feature is not supported when you long press the number key in another mode. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Removing the Association between Entry and Programmable Number Key 1 Access the required alias or ID via:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t Steps Radio Control Program-

med number key Menu Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or ID; press to select. l P u s M o d e 1 to access the menu. 67 English Radio Control Steps 2 3 or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. or select. to Program Key and press to or to Empty and press to select. The first line of the display shows Clear from all keys? . or to Yes and press to select. Note:

When an entry is deleted, the association between the entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Adding a New Contact 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to New Contact and press to or to the required contact type, either Radio Contact or Phone Contact, and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 2 3 4 68 English 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and 4 press to confirm. 6 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. 7 If adding a Radio Contact, required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. to select. to the or Setting a Default Contact 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to to the required alias or ID and press or to select. to Set as Default and press or to select. The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. A ID. appears beside the selected default alias or Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 1 2 3 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to Radio Settings and press or to select. 69 English 4 5 6 7 or select. or to select. to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press or to Call Alert and press to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 2 3 4 5 6 7 70 English or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press to Private Call and press to enable/disable the Private Call beside Enabled, if Private Press ringing tones. The display shows Call ringing tones are enabled. The Call ringing tones are disabled. disappears from beside Enabled, if Private Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective Call You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Selective Call. 7 or to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to Selective Call and press or to select. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 71 English 5 6 7 or to select. to Call Ringers and press to Text Message and press or to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry Status with Text You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Telemetry Status with Text. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 3 4 5 6 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press or to Telemetry and press to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. Assigning Ring Styles You can program your radio to sound one of ten predefined ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert or a Text Message from a particular contact. The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through the list. 1 to access the menu. 72 English 2 3 4 5 6 or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or to Edit and press to select. or to select. to Edit Ringtone and press or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. to Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Store alias or ID to Contacts Delete View Details Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to or to preferred list and press to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 73 English 4 or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. 5 or to select. to Delete Entry? and press 6 Do one of the following:

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Deleting a Call from a Call List 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press or to select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 74 English Press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. or to No, and press the button to return to the previous screen. Viewing Details from a Call List 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 5 to View Details and press or to select. Display shows details. See Notification List on page 111 for details about the Notification List. See Call Log Features on page 73 for details about the Missed Call List. Call Alert Operation Making a Call Alert from the Contact List Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and is accessible through the menu via Contacts or manual dial. Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert When you receive a Call Alert page, you the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow, do one of the following:

Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press alert is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 75 English If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias or ID. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. Emergency Operation An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You are able to initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display even when there is activity on the current channel. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. Note:

If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow Note:

Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to the programmed Emergency button. In addition, each alarm has the following types:

Regular Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Silent Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound through the radios speaker, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. Silent with Voice Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to sound through the radios speaker. Receiving an Emergency Alarm On receiving an emergency alarm the emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the LED blinks red and the radio displays the emergency caller alias. If more than one alarm has occurred all emergency caller aliases are displayed in an Alarm List. 1 When receiving an emergency alarm, do one of the following:

to view more details. Press If a single emergency call alias is displayed, press again to view your action details. If the multiple emergency caller aliases are displayed in the Alarm List, the required alias and press details. Press items. again to view your action or to view more to 2 Press To revisit the Alarm List, press menu and select Alarm List. and select Yes to exit the Alarm List. to access the Responding to an Emergency Alarm A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 In the Alarm List, alias. or to the required 77 English 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you will hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now available for use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the same group that the Emergency Alarm was targeted to. Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency initiating radio. All other radios

(including the emergency receiving radio) transmit non-emergency voice. The LED lights up solid green. Your radio remains in the Emergency mode. 4 Do one of the following:

Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 5 Release the PTT button to listen. 78 English When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. 6 Your radio displays the Alarm List. Exiting Emergency Mode After Receiving the Emergency Alarm Exit the Emergency mode by performing one of the following actions:

Delete the alarm items, see Deleting an Alarm Item from the Alarm List for more information. Power down the radio. Sending an Emergency Alarm This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of radios. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode. Press the programmed Emergency On button. The display shows one of the following:

Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. If your radio does not receive an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement, and after all retries have been exhausted, a tone sounds and the display shows Alarm Failed. Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the Home screen. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group, the group of radios can communicate over a programmed Emergency channel. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the speaker of the radio, until you press the PTT button to initiate the call. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, but allow incoming calls to sound through the speaker of the radio. The indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate, or respond to, the call. 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency footswitch. The display shows Sending Alarm, which alternates with your radio ID. Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the Home screen display. When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received, the Emergency tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The display shows Alarm Sent. Your radio enters the emergency call mode when the display shows Emergency and the destination group alias. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 79 English 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green and the Group icon appears on the display. 4 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone The PTT Sidetone 5 Release the PTT button to listen. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. 6 Press the PTT button to respond. 7 Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode. Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group of radios. The microphone of your radio is e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

Your radio cannot detect a non-IMPRES microphone that is attached to the rear accessory connector. When no microphone is detected at the specified programmed connector, your radio checks the alternative connector. Here, your radio gives priority to the detected microphone. See the table for examples. Type of microphone connected to... Rear Front Connec-

Connec-

tor tor Any mi-

Non-IM-

PRES crophone Radio uses... Program-

med Connec-

tor*

Rear Rear mi-

crophone Radio uses... Program-

med Connec-

tor*

Type of microphone connected to... Rear Front Connec-

Connec-

tor tor Non-IM-

Any mi-

crophone PRES IMPRES Non-IM-

Rear Front Front mi-

crophone Front mi-

crophone Rear mi-

Non-IM-

PRES crophone

*Check with your dealer or system adminis-

trator for more information. PRES IMPRES Front If your radio has Emergency Cycle Mode enabled, repetitions of hot mic and receiving period are made for a programmed duration. If you press the PTT button during the programmed receiving period, you hear a prohibit tone, indicating that you should release the PTT button. The radio ignores the PTT press and remains in Emergency mode. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received calls to sound through the speaker of the radio, until the programmed hot mic transmission period is over, and you press the PTT button. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when you are making the call with hot mic, but allow sound through the speaker of the radio when the target radio responds after the programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators only appear when you press the PTT button. Note:

If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic state directly. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 81 English 1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the Emergency On footswitch. The display shows one of the following:

Tx Alarm and the destination alias. Tx Telegram and the destination alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon is displayed. 2 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the microphone. When hot mic has been enabled, the radio automatically transmits without a PTT button press until the hot mic duration expires. While transmitting, the LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon appears on the display. 3 The radio automatically stops transmitting when the cycling duration between hot mic and receiving calls expires, if Emergency Cycle Mode is enabled. 4 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio automatically stops transmitting. To transmit again, press the PTT button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English Reinitiating an Emergency Mode Note:

This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the Emergency Alarm. There are two instances where this can happen:

You change the channel while the radio is in Emergency mode. This exits the Emergency mode. If Emergency Alarm is enabled on this new channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency. You press the programmed Emergency On button during an Emergency initiation/transmission state. This causes the radio to exit this state, and to reinitiate Emergency. Exiting Emergency Mode After Sending the Emergency Alarm Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the following occurs:

Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received

(for Emergency Alarm only). All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted. The Emergency Off button is pressed. Note:

If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency mode. The radio will not reinitiate the Emergency mode automatically when it is turned on again. If you change channels when your radio is in Emergency mode to a channel that has no emergency system configured, No Emergency is shown on your display. Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or an e-mail application. Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 50 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 4 or select. to Quick Text and press to or to the required and press to select. Press to select. to the required alias or ID and press or to select. The display shows the transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 83 English If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows the negative mini notice. Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias or ID. The display shows the transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows the negative mini notice. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 85). Accessing the Drafts Folder The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

You can edit saved text message before sending it. Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 165. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English 2 3 or select. to Drafts and press to to the required message and press or to select. 3 4 to the required message and press or to select. or to Delete and press to delete the text message. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 or select. to Drafts and press to You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Resend Forward Edit (only available with a keypad microphone. See Editing a Text Message on page 167 for more information). Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only edit and forward a Fail-

to-Send message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 85 English Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. 1 2 or select. to Forward and press to or to to select. Select the message recipient by the required alias or ID and press The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:

You can also manually select a target radio address (see Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial on page 166). Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing one of the following actions:

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or select. to Sent Items and press to to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 35). Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:

Resend Forward Edit Delete Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or delete a Sent message. 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the following options and press Op-

tion For ward to select. Steps Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 87 English Op-

tion Steps Op-

tion Steps De lete Re send group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 86). Select Delete to delete the text mes-

sage. Select Resend to resend the selected text message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID. The display shows transitional mini no-

tice, confirming that the same message is being sent to the same target radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows posi-

tive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows neg-

ative mini notice. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/group alias or ID. Note:

Changing the volume, and pressing any button, except for

, returns

, or

, you to the message. The radio exits the Resend op-

tion screen if you press the PTT button to initiate a Private or Group Call, or to respond to a Group Call. The radio also exits the screen when it receives a text message, an emergency call or alarm, or a call alert. The display returns to the Re send option screen if you press the PTT button to respond to a Private Call (except when the ra-

dio is displaying the Missed Call e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English Op-

tion Steps screen), and at the end of an All Call. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or to Sent Items and press to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). or select. to Delete All and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 4 Choose one of the following. 89 English or or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. to No and press to return to the previous screen. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:

Read Read Later Delete Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the 2 Reading a Text Message 1 or and press Option Read?

to one of the options described next to select. Steps Choosing this option, opens the se-

lected message in the Inbox. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. Press to return to the Inbox. Press a second time to reply, forward, or delete the text message. Read Later Choosing this option, returns you to the screen you were on prior to receiv-

ing the text message. Delete Choosing this option, deletes the se-

lected text message. or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 3 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:

Reply (via Quick Text) Forward Delete Delete All Note:

If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity Plus or Linked Capacity Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or or to Messages and press to to Inbox and press to select. to view the messages. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 5 Do one of the following:

91 English Press press that message. to select the current message, and again to reply, forward, or delete Long press to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Messages and press to or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message. The display shows Telemetry: <Status Text Message>. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English 5 Long press to return to the Home screen. Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. 4 5 6 7 Press once more to access the sub-menu. or to Reply and press to select. or select. to Quick Reply and press to to the required message and press or to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 85). Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 93 English 4 5 6 e d o M s u P l Press once more to access the sub-menu. or select. to Delete and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English 2 3 4 or to Inbox and press to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). or select. to Delete All and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. Job Tickets Your radio is able to receive Job Tickets, which are messages from the dispatcher listing out tasks that need to be performed. You can respond to Job Tickets in order to sort them into Job Ticket Folders. By default, the folders are All", "New", "Started", and "Completed". Check with your dealer or system administrator for an additional 10 folders. Your radio supports a maximum of 100 Job Tickets, all of which can be seen in the "All" folder. New Job Tickets and Job Tickets with recent change in state are listed first. Upon reaching the maximum number of Job Tickets, the next Job Ticket automatically replaces the last Job Ticket in your radio. Note:

Job Tickets are retained even after radio is powered down and powered up again. Your radio will automatically detect and discard the duplicated Job Tickets with the same subject line. Accessing the Job Ticket Folder Steps Access the Job Ticket folder. Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Job Ticket button or and press button. 2 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket to the required folder to select. Radio Control Steps Menu Note:

You can also press and the corresponding num-

ber key (19) to access the required folder. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Job Tickets and press to select. or and press to the required folder to select. Note:

You can also press and the corresponding num-

ber key (19) to access the required folder. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 95 English Radio Control Steps 4 or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. Logging In and Out of the Remote Server This feature allows you to log in and log out of the remote server by using your user ID via the menu. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Log In and press to select. If you are already logged in, menu displays Log Out. The display shows a transitional mini notice, confirming that you have been logged in successfully. If you have failed to log in, the display shows a negative mini notice. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English Creating and Sending a Job Ticket Your radio is able to create Job Tickets, which is based on a Job Ticket template and send out tasks that need to be performed. Note:

CPS is required to configure the Job Ticket template. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Job Tickets and press to to Create Ticket and press 4 Depending on how your radio is configured, do one of the following:

If If your radio is configured with one Job Ticket template, If your radio is configured with more than one Job Ticket tem-

plate, Then 2 1 Use the keypad to type the required room number and press to select. or to Room Sta tus and press lect. to se-

or to the re-

quired option and press 3 to select. or to the required to se-

option and press lect. 5 or to Send and press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is sent. If the message is not sent, the display shows negative mini notice. Responding to the Job Ticket 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Job Tickets and press to to the required folder and press or to select. You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to access the required folder. or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. once more to access the sub-menu. Press You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to Quick Reply. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 97 English 6 or to the required Job Ticket and to select. press You can also press the corresponding number key

(19) to respond to the job ticket. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Deleting a Job Ticket Steps Delete a Job Ticket. Radio Control Pro-

gram-

med Job Ticket button 2 button. 1 Press the programmed Job Ticket to All and press or to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Radio Control Menu Steps 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Job Tickets and press to select. to All and press or to select. or to the required Job Ticket and press to select. Note:

At Step 4, while viewing the Job Ticket, press delete. to Press Job Ticket. again while viewing the to Delete and press or to select. Radio Control Steps Note:

You can also press delete. to Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports two types of privacy:

Basic Privacy. Enhanced Privacy. Only one of the privacy types above can be assigned to the radio. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key (for Basic Privacy), or the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Privacy Key, or a different Key Value and Key ID, you will either hear a garbled transmission

(Basic Privacy) or nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. 99 English Note:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Privacy and press to to enable/disable Privacy. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Multi-Site Controls These features are applicable when your current radio channel is part of an IP Site Connect or Linked Capacity Plus configuration. See IP Site Connect on page 39 and Linked Capacity Plus on page 40 for more details about these configurations. Starting an Automatic Site Search Note:

The radio only scans for a new site if the current signal is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current site. If the RSSI value is strong, the radio remains on the current site. Radio Controls Site Lock On/Off button Steps Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button to toggle the start/stop automatic site search. 1 2 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English Radio Controls Radio menu Steps 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or and press or and press to Radio Settings to select. to Site Roaming to select. or to Site Lock and press to select. If the current channel is a multi-site channel with an attached roam list and is out of range, the radio also performs an automatic site search (site is unlocked) during:

a PTT button press. data transmission. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. The display shows the Site Roaming icon and channel alias. The LED blinks yellow rapidly when the radio is actively searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks on to a site. Stopping an Automatic Site Search Steps When your radio is actively searching for a new site, you can stop the search by Radio Controls Site Lock On/Off button Radio menu to access the menu. 1 2 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to Utilities and press to select. 101 English Radio Controls Steps 3 4 5 or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or and press to Site Roaming to select. or to Site Lock and press to select. A tone sounds and the display shows Site Locked. The radio then returns to the Home screen. and the display shows the channel alias. Starting a Manual Site Search Start a Manual Site Search by e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 102 English Radio Controls Manual Site Roam button Radio menu Steps Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button to start the manual site search. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or and press or and press to Site Roaming to select. to Active Search to select. A tone sounds, the display shows Finding Site, and the LED blinks green. If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Site <Alias>

Found. If there is no available site within range, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Out of Range. If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The display shows Channel Busy. The radio returns to the Home screen. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. Note:

Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by Steps Radio Con-

trols Radio Disable button Radio menu 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Disa-

ble button. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 103 English Steps Radio Con-

trols or to the required to alias or ID and press select. Use the Manual Dial menu. or al and press to Manual Di to select. or to Radio Num to select. ber and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press Steps Radio Con-

trols 4 or and press to Radio Disable to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Disable

. Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Radio Con-

trols Radio Enable button Radio menu Steps 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Ena-

ble button. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly. Steps Radio Con-

trols or to the required to alias or ID and press select. Use the Manual Dial menu. or al and press to Manual Di to select. or to Radio Num to select. ber and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 105 English Steps Radio Con-

trols 4 or and press to Radio Enable to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows positive mini notice. If not successful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display shows negative mini notice. Do not press operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio Enable Lone Worker This feature raises an emergency if there is no user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the channel selector, for a predefined time. Before raising the emergency, when the inactivity timer expires, the radio warns the user via an audio indicator. If there is still no acknowledgement by the user before the predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an Emergency Alarm. Only one of the following Emergency Alarms can be assigned to this feature:

Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow The radio remains in the emergency state allowing voice messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency Operation on page 76 on ways to exit Emergency. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English Note:

This feature is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Bluetooth Operation Note:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 107 English 3 or to My Status and press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

or to On and press The display shows On and a the selected status. to select. appears left of or to Off and press The display shows Off and a the selected status. to select. appears left of Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the operation. 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled devices user manual. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A On your radio, press to access the menu. 2 108 English 3 4 or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to 5 Do one of the following:

6 to the required device and press or to select. or to Find Devices to locate available devices. device and press to the required or to select. or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. If successful, the radio display shows <Device>

Connected. A tone sounds and the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. appears besides Note:

If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 107. 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to 4 or to Find Me and press to select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device On your radio, press to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to 1 2 3 4 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to the required device and press or to select. 109 English 5 or to Disconnect and press to select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. Viewing Device Details 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. or to select. to View Details and press Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 or select. to BT Mic Gain and press to or to the BT Mic Gain type and the current values. To edit values, press to select. or and press to increase or to decrease values to select. or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. Notification List A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, telemetry messages and missed calls. Unread Job Tickets are also stored in the notification list. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. For TMS and missed call/call alert notification events, the maximum number are 30 TMS and 10 missed calls/call alerts. This maximum number depends on l P u s M o d e 111 English individual feature (job tickets or TMS or missed calls/

call alerts) list capability. Note:

After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. Accessing the Notification List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to select. to Notification and press to the required event and press or to select. Long press to return to the Home Screen. Auto-Range Transponder System (ARTS) ARTS is an analog-only feature designed to inform you when your radio is out-of-range of other ARTS-

equipped radios. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 112 English ARTS-equipped radios transmit or receive signals periodically to confirm that they are within range of each other. Your dealer can program your radio to transmit or receive the ARTS signal. Your radio provides indications of states as follows:

First-Time Alert A tone sounds and the display shows In Range after the channel alias. ARTS-in-Range Alert A tone sounds, if programmed, and the display shows In Range after the channel alias. ARTS-Out-of-Range Alert A tone sounds, the LED rapidly blinks red, and the display alternates between Out of Range and the home screen. Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) Your radio can be updated by your dealer remotely, via OTAP, without needing to be physically connected. Additionally, some settings can also be configured via OTAP. While undergoing OTAP, the LED blinks green. Note:

When the radio is receiving high volume data, the High Volume Data icon appears and channel is busy. A PTT button press at this time may cause a negative tone to sound. Once the programming is complete, depending on your radios configuration:

A tone sounds, the display shows Updating Restarting, and your radio restarts (powers off and on again). Select between Restart Now or Postpone. Selecting Postpone allows your radio to return to the previous display, with an OTAP Timer icon visible, for a period of time before the automatic restart occurs. Upon power up after the automatic restart occurs, the display shows Sw Update Completed if the OTAP update is successful or Sw Update Failed if the OTAP update is unsuccessful. See Software Update on page 138 for your updated software version. Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-

Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. Turning Wi-Fi On or Off Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Wi-Fi Operation Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Access this feature via the menu. a) Press to access the menu. 113 English b) c) Press to select. Press press or to WiFi and press to WiFi Status and or to select. Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled. Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. You can also connect to a network access point via the menu. 1 Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. Press and press Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press or to a network access point to select. or to Connect and press Enter the password and press When the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. Refreshing the Network List Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 114 English Perform the following actions to refresh the network list. a) Press Press to select. b) c) Press or to select. to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to Networks and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. a) to Refresh and press Press or to select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. Adding a Network Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. 6 7 If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Press or to select. to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press

. Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press

. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 115 English The radio displays network is successfully saved. to indicate that the Viewing Details of Network Access Points Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Perform the following actions to view details of network access points. 5 Press or to select. to View Details and press For a connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address are displayed. For a non-connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode are displayed. 1 2 3 4 Press to access the menu. Removing Network Access Points Press select. Press to select. Press and press or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Enterprise network access points that are added via CPS can only be removed via CPS. Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. or to a network access point 1 to select. Press to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 116 English 2 3 4 5 6 Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press or Press access point and press to the selected network to select. Press select. Press select. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press to The radio displays selected network access point is successfully removed. to indicate that the Third Party Peripherals Connection Modes You can select one of the third party peripherals connection modes:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Motorola PC and Audio Data Accessory Telemetry Generic to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Cable Type and press to 1 2 3 4 5 to the required connection mode to select. or and press The display shows the selected connection mode. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. 117 English Note:

You cannot change the connection mode while the cable of the third party peripheral is still attached to your radio. Utilities Setting the Squelch Level You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted) calls and/or background noise; however, calls from remote locations may also be filtered out. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Press the programmed Squelch button to toggle squelch level between normal and tight. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radios menus. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 118 English 2 3 4 5 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Squelch and press to to the required setting and press or to select. appears besides selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. Setting the Power Level Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. You can customize the power setting of the radio to high or low for each channel. High enables communication with radios located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with radios in closer proximity. Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 3 4 5 Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. Press press to Radio Settings and or to select. or to Power and press to to the required setting and or to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time, to return to the Home screen. long press Screen returns to the previous menu. Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off A channel can support up to 6 option board features. Refer to your dealer or system administrator for more information. Press the programmed Option Board Feature button to toggle the feature on or off. Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 119 English 4 or select. to Cable Type and press to 5 The current cable type is indicated by a

. Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) Feature On or Off This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice activated call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice. Note:

This feature is not applicable in Citizens Band channels that are in the same frequency. Pressing the PTT button during radio operation will disable VOX. To re-enable VOX, do one of the following:

Turn the radio off and power it on again. Change the channel via the Scroll Up/Down buttons. Change the channel via Volume/Channel Knob. Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the feature on or off. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 120 English Follow the steps described next to access this feature via the radio menu. If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off on page 122), use a trigger word to initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before speaking clearly into the microphone. Note:

Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to VOX and press to select. 5 Press to disable/enable VOX. Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press 5 6 or select. to All Tones and press to to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. l P u s M o d e 121 English 4 5 6 or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Vol. Offset and press to or to the required volume value. The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:

Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press volume offset settings. to exit without changing the current Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 122 English 2 3 4 5 6 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Talk Permit and press to to enable/disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Power Up and press to to enable/disable the Power Up Alert Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Text Message Alert Tone You can customize your radios text message alert tone to Momentary or Repetitive for each entry in the Contacts list. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to Message Alert and press or to select. The display shows Momentary and Repetitive. to the required setting and press or to enable. appears besides selected setting. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 123 English Changing the Display Mode You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. Steps Change the Display Mode:

Radio Control Program-

med Dis-

play Mode Button Menu Press the programmed Display Mode button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Utilities and 3 press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 124 English Radio Control Steps 4 5 or to Display and to select. press The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. or to the required set-

ting and press appears besides selected setting. to enable. Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. Note:

Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. Adjust the Display Brightness by performing one of the following actions:

Radio Control Program-

med Dis-

play Bright-

ness Button Menu Steps Radio Control Steps 1 Press the programmed Bright-

ness button. 2 Decrease display brightness by or increase the dis-

pressing play brightness by pressing

. Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or and press to Radio Settings to select. or to Brightness and press to select. The display shows a progress bar. 5 Decrease display brightness by or increase the dis-

pressing

. play brightness by pressing Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 1 2 3 A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e to Radio Settings and press or to select. 125 English 4 5 or select. to Languages and press to or to enable. language. to the required language and press appears beside selected Turning Horns/Lights On or Off This feature needs to be installed through your radios rear accessory connector by your dealer. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights. Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns and light feature on or off. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 126 English 3 4 5 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Horn/Lights and press to to enable/disable Horns/Lights. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. 4 5 or to select. to LED Indicator and press to enable/disable the LED Indicator. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Public Address System On or Off You can enable and disable the radios internal public address (PA) system. Press the programmed PA On/Off button to toggle the feature on or off. Turning the External Public Address System On or Off You can enable or disable the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the radios internal public address (PA) system. Press the programmed Ext PA On/Off button to toggle the feature on or off. Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob. Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a Volume Knob only. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Dual Knob and press to 5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume &

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Ch. press or to the required setting and to select. appears beside selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. 127 English Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off The disappears from beside Enabled. You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Display and press to to Intro Screen and press to enable/disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 128 English Turning the Voice Announcement On or Off This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Setting the Text-to-Speech Feature Note:

The Text-to-Speech feature can only be enabled via the MOTOTRBO Customer Programming Software. If enabled, the Voice Announcement feature is automatically disabled, and vice versa. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the following features:

Current Channel Current Zone Programmed button feature on or off Content of received text messages Content of received Job Tickets This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. to change the selected A d v a n c e d F e a t or You can also use option. All Messages Job Tickets Channel Zone Program Button 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to appears beside the selected setting. to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Voice Announcement and press or to select. or to any of the following features and press to select. Call Forwarding You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls to another radio. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Utilities and press to to Call Forward and press u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 4 Do one of the following:

129 English Press display shows to enable Call Forwarding. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Call Forwarding. The Menu Timer Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Display and press to 1 2 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A or select. or select. 130 English 6 to the required setting and press or to select. Analog Mic AGC (Mic AGC-A) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on an analog system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Mic AGC-A and press to to Menu Timer and press to 5 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Mic AGC-A. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-A. The Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Mic AGC-D and press to 5 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. Note:

This feature is not applicable during a Bluetooth session. Steps Toggle Intelligent Audio On or Off. Radio Control Program-

med In-

telligent Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 131 English Steps Radio Control Steps 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or to Intelligent to select. Audio and press 5 Do one of the following:

Press gent Audio. The display shows to enable Intelli-

beside Enabled. Press gent Audio. The from beside Enabled. to disable Intelli-

disappears Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. Steps Toggle the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off by performing one of the following actions:

Radio Control Program-

med Acoustic Feedback Suppres-

sor Button Press the programmed Acoustic Feedback Suppressor button. Radio Control Audio Button Menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 132 English Steps Setting the Audio Ambience Radio Control Menu 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Utilities and press to select. or to Radio Set tings and press to select. or and press to AF Suppressor to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press to enable Acous-

tic Feedback Suppressor. The display shows beside Ena-

bled. Press to disable Acous-

tic Feedback Suppressor. The disappears from beside En-

abled. You can customize the audio ambience of the radio according to your environment. Default enables the default factory settings. Loud enables Noise Suppressor and increases speaker loudness for use in noisy surroundings. Work Group enables AF Suppressor and disables AGC for use when a group of radios are near to each other. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Audio Ambience and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 133 English 5 to the required setting and press or to select. appears beside the selected setting. Setting the Audio Profiles You can customize the audio profiles of the radio according to your preference. Default disables the previously selected audio profile and the radios audio profile returns to normal. Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3 are audio profiles intended to compensate for noise-induced hearing loss that is typical for adults in their 40s, 50s, and 60s or over. Treble Boost, Mid Boost, and Bass Boost are for a tinnier sound, a more nasal sound, and a deeper sound. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 134 English 3 4 5 to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Audio Profiles and press or to select. to the required setting and press or to select. appears beside the selected setting. Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radios precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System

(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System

(BDS). Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. Note:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. to Radio Settings and or to select. or to GPS and press to to enable/disable GPS/GNSS. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page 137 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information. Flexible Receive List Flexible Receive List is a digital-only (currently supported in Capacity Plus and Linked Capacity Plus) feature that allows you to add, delete or edit members on the receive talkgroup list. Your radio can support a maximum of 16 members in the list. Turning the Flexible Receive List On or Off You can enable and disable the Flexible Receive List if needed. Steps Enable the Flexible Receive List by performing one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trol Programmed Flexible Re-

ceive List Button Menu Press the programmed Flexible Receive List button. 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 135 English Radio Con-

trol Steps 2 3 e d o M s u P l or to Flexible Rx to select. List and press Press to enable or disa-

ble the Flexible Receive List feature. Previous display Current display Turn On Flexible Rx List On Turn Off Flexible Rx List Off Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GPS Information Software Update Site Information t c e n n o C

-

n o N n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 136 English at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Press screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Checking the Radio Alias and ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to check your radio alias and ID. You hear a positive indicator tone. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to My ID and press to select. The first line of the display shows the radio alias. The second line of the display shows the radio ID. You can also press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to return to the previous screen. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Versions and press to select. The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions. Checking the GPS/GNSS Information Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version to access the menu. 1 2 3 4 or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to GPS Info and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 137 English 5 to the required item and press or to select. The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS information. See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 134 for details on GPS/GNSS. Software Update Displays the date and time of the latest software update carried out via Over-the-Air Programming. Note:

Software Update menu is only available after at least one successful OTAP session. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C

-

n o N n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 138 English 4 or to SW Update and press to select. The display shows the date and time of the latest software update. See Over-the-Air-Programming (OTAP) on page 112 for details on OTAP session. Site Information Displays the current Linked Capacity Plus site name your radio is on. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Site Info and press to select. The display shows the current Linked Capacity Plus site name. See Linked Capacity Plus on page 40 for details on Linked Capacity Plus. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n N o n

-

C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 139 English Keypad Microphone Features Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the 4Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola part number RMN5127_) to access your radios features. You can use the keypad to enter subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require that you press a key multiple times. The next table shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character. Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 5 1 1

!

2

. 3

, 4

?

6

@

7

&

8

'

9

%

10 11

:

12

*

13

#

A D G J M B E H K N C F I L O 2 3 4 5 6 t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 140 English Key Number of Times Key is Pressed 5 1 P 7 2 Q 3 R 4 S 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 T W 0

* or del

# or space U X V Y 8 Z 9 Note:

Press to enter 0 and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock. Note:

Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a *. Note:

Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a #. Long press to change text entry method. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off You can enable and disable keypad tones if needed. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 141 English to access the menu. or or or or to Utilities and press to select. to Radio Settings and press to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to select. to Keypad Tones and press to select. to enable/disable keypad tones. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 142 English Additional Advanced Features Selecting a Zone by Alias Search to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. 3 Key in the first character of the required zone. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type the required zone. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press the key to delete any unwanted characters.Long press to change the text entry method. The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. Note:

The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more zones with the same name, the radio displays the zone that is listed first in the zone list. 3 4 or select. or select. to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Number and press to 5 Do one of the following:

If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press to select. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 5 to select. The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. 6 Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to

. or to Radio Check and press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. 143 English If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:

If the button is pressed when the radio is waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. 6 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Initiating a Remote Monitor by Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Number and press to t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 5 Do one of the following:

144 English If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press to select. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. or to Remote Mon. and press to select. The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED lights up. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:

If the button is pressed when the radio is waiting for acknowledgement, a tone sounds and the radio terminates all retries and exits Radio Check mode. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen. Making a Private Call by Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Radio Number and press to 5 Do one of the following:

If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press to select. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. 6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The display show the destination alias. 7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 8 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the green LED blinks. If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time, the call ends. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 145 English Making a Phone Call by Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Phone Number and press to 5 Do one of the following:

The display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number and press to proceed. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press to proceed. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 146 English The green LED lights up. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Do one of the following:

to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the step above or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Note:

When you press PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, a tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to During the channel access, press dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/

deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Phone Call with the One Touch Access Button 1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Phone Call to the predefined alias or ID. 147 English If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to proceed. 2 If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and The green LED lights up. The Phone Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The Phone Call icon remains in the top right corner. If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 3 Do one of the following:

148 English to end the call. Press If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press The radio returns to the previous screen. to proceed. Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the step above or wait for the telephone user to end the call. Note:

During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/

deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. 1 Long press the programmed number key to make a Group, Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID. If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative indicator tone sounds. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status for a Private Call or All Call for All Call. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Making a Group, Private or All Call with the Programmable Number Key The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a keypad microphone. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key, but you can have more than one number key associated to an alias or ID. When you are on the Home Screen:

3 Wait for one of the following tones to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. The Talk Permit Tone the PTT Sidetone (Group Call only). 4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the green LED blinks. The display shows the destination alias. 5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases the PTT button, 149 English indicating the channel is free for you to respond. Press the PTT button to respond. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends. See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on page 66 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on the keypad. Making a Phone Call with the Programmable Phone Button 1 Press the programmed Phone button to enter into the Phone Entry list. 2 or to the required subscriber alias or to select. ID, and press If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 150 English button to proceed. shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If successful, The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon, If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 3 Press the PTT to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 4 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 5 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. to i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the Step 5 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:

During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. 151 English During channel access and access/

deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Making a Phone Call from Contacts 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 4 5 to 3 Do one of the following:

or to the required subscriber alias or ID. or to select. to Manual Dial and press t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 152 English to Phone Number and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. to select. Press If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone and press to select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. button to proceed. If successful, The DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon, If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 8 Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. to Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the Step 8 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. 153 English When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:

During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/

deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 154 English Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Do one of the following:

or to the required subscriber alias or ID. or to select. to Manual Dial and press to Phone Number and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Phone Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter a telephone number. 4 5 to select. Press If the entry selected is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Invalid #. or to Call Phone and press to button to proceed. select. If the access code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows Access Code:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the access code and press the The first line of the display shows Calling. The second line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the Phone Call icon. If successful, the DTMF tone sounds. You hear the dialing tone of the telephone user. The first line of the display shows the subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line of the display shows Phone Call and the Phone Call icon, If unsuccessful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Failed. Your radio returns to the Access Code input screen. If the access code i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t was preconfigured in the Contacts list, the radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. 6 Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. The RSSI icon disappears during transmission. 7 To enter extra digits, if requested by the Phone Call, do one of the following. Press any keypad key to begin the input of the extra digits. The first line of the display shows Extra Digits:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the extra digits and press the DTMF tone sounds and the radio returns to the previous screen. button to proceed. The Press One Touch Access button. The DTMF tone sounds. If the entry for the One Touch Access button is empty, a negative indicator tone sounds. 8 Press to end the call. If deaccess code was not preconfigured in the Contacts list, the first line of the display shows De-Access Code:. The 155 English to second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Enter the deaccess code and press proceed. The radio returns to the previous screen. The DTMF tone sounds and the display shows Ending Phone Call. If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. Your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. If unsuccessful, your radio returns to the Phone Call screen. Repeat the Step 8 or wait for the telephone user to end the call. When you press the PTT button while in the Phone Contacts screen, as tone sounds and the display shows Press OK to Place Phone Call. When the telephone user ends the call, a tone sounds and the display shows Phone Call Ended. If the call ends while you are entering the extra digits requested by the Phone Call, your radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Note:

During the channel access, press to dismiss the call attempt and a tone sounds. During the call, when you press One Touch Access button with the deaccess code preconfigured or enter the deaccess code as the input for extra digits, your radio attempts to end the call. During channel access and access/

deaccess code or extra digits transmission, you radio responds to On/Off button, Volume Knob, and Channel Rocker only. A tone sounds for every invalid input. The access or deaccess code cannot be more than 10 characters. Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search 1 2 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 156 English 3 or select. to Scan List and press to Editing the Scan List Adding a New Entry to the Scan List 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. or select. to Scan List and press to to Add Member and press to 5 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 6 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 157 English to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 7 8 Press to select. or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice, followed immediately by Add Another?. 9 Do one of the following:

or or to Yes and press to select, to add another entry, and repeat Steps 5 to 8. to No and press to select to save the current list. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 158 English Deleting an Entry from the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 6 7 Press to select. or select. to Delete and press to 8 Do one of the following:

or to Yes and press to select, to delete the entry. The display shows positive mini notice. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. to select Repeat Steps 4 to 8 to delete other entries. After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press the button to return to the Home Screen. Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan List 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. or select. to Scan List and press to 4 Key in the first character of the required alias. A blinking cursor appears. 5 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Press to delete any unwanted characters. to change the text entry method. Long press The first line of the display show the characters you keyed in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search results. 159 English The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that is listed first in the Scan list. 6 7 8 Press to select. or to select. to Edit Priority and press or to the required priority level and to select. press The display shows positive mini notice before returning to the previous screen. The priority icon appears left of the name of the member. There is no priority icon if priority is set to None. Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List 1 to access the menu. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 160 English 2 3 4 5 or select. or to select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press to the required alias or ID and press or to select. or to Store and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 6 If needed, key in the alias for the ID and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. You can also store an ID without an alias. Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial 1 to access the menu. 2 3 or select. to Contacts and press to or to Manual Dial and press select. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Enter the subscriber ID you want to send the Call Alert to and press

. 5 or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows positive mini notice. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows negative mini notice. RSSI Values Your radio shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) icon at the top of your display. This feature allows you to view the RSSI values. When you are on the Home screen:

to 1 2 three times ( _ _ ) and immediately three times ( _ _ ), all within 5 Press press seconds. The display shows the current RSSI values. button to return to the Home Long press the screen. See Display Icons on page 31 for details on the RSSI Icon. Text Messaging The maximum length of characters for sending a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from an e-mail application), depends on CPS configuration which can be configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 161 English can receive a text message with maximum length of 280 characters. If user forwards a text message with characters more than the maximum length, the text message will be truncated to the maximum length. Note:

The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Any text message in the writing/editing screen is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. Writing and Sending a Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 162 English 2 or select. to Compose and press to 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press the right. or the key to move one space to Press to delete any unwanted characters. 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Do one of the following:

to the required or ID and press or to select. or to Manual Dial and press to select. Key in the subscriber ID and press

. to edit the message. again to discard the message or save it to the Drafts folder. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:

If the text message fails to send, the radio return you to the Resend option screen

(see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 85). Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. Radio Con-

trols Menu Steps 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. or to Inbox and press to select. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t to the required message and press or to select. A subject line may be shown if the message is from an e-mail application. Press options. once more to access the additional 2 3 4 5 or to Reply and press A blinking cursor appears. 6 Use the keypad to type your message. to select. 163 English Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. 7 Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. Press once message is composed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:

If the text message fails to send, the radio return you to the Resend option screen

(see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 166). t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 164 English If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. Editing a Quick Reply Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 or select. to Quick Reply and press to or to the required Quick Text and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 4 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 5 Press once message is composed. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice.

(see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 166). Accessing the Drafts Folder You can save a text message to send it at a later time. If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the process of writing or editing a text message, your current text message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder. The most recent saved text message is always added to the top of the Drafts list. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 84. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message Note:

If the text message fails to send, the radio return you to the Resend option screen 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 165 English A blinking cursor appears. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press 3 Use the keypad to type your message. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change text entry method. 4 Press once message is composed. 5 Do one of the following:

or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to Manual Dial and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 166 English The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:

If the text message fails to send, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen. You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Forward Edit Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. or select. to Forward and press to 1 or to Edit and press to select. A blinking cursor appears. 1 2 3 or to Manual Dial and press to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:

Key in the subscriber ID and press

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Editing a Text Message Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Note:

If a subject line is present (for messages received from an e-mail application), you cannot edit it. 2 Use the keypad to type the required alias. Press to move one space to the left. Press to move one space to the right. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Long press to change the text entry method. 3 Press once message is composed. 4 Do one of the following:

or to the required alias or ID and press to select. or to select to Manual Dial and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 167 English 5 Key in the subscriber ID and press

. The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio to operate in a radio system with an interface to telephone systems. To initiate a DTMF call. 1 Press and hold the PTT button. 2 Enter the desired number, You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and alerts (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on page 121). or

. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 168 English Security Radio Disable via Manual Dial 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. or select. to Manual Dial and press to to Private Call and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. Key in the subscriber ID and press

. or to select. to Radio Disable and press The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the request is in progress. The green LED blinks. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. Note:

Do not press Disable operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio 3 4 5 6 or select. to Manual Dial and press to to Private Call and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. Key in the subscriber ID and press

. to Radio Enable and press or to select. The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias or ID. The green LED blinks. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Radio Enable via Manual Dial 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 7 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. to 169 English Note:

Do not press Enable operation as you will not get an acknowledgement message. during the Radio to enter the selected digit and value and move to the next digit. Each digit changes to Press to confirm your selection. Password Lock Features If enabled, this feature only allows you access your radio if the correct password is entered upon powering up. You can use a keypad microphone or Scroll Up/

Down buttons to enter password. Accessing the Radio from Password 1 Power up your radio. You hear a continuous tone. 2 Do one of the following:

Enter your current four-digit password via keypad microphone. The display shows Press to proceed. Enter your current four-digit password. Press or to edit each digits numeric t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 170 English on the to remove each when the line is empty, or if you press You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit entered. Press display. You hear a negative indicator tone, if you press more than four digits. If the password is correct, your radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the Radio on page 22. If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2. After the third incorrect password, the display shows Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A tone sounds and the LED double blinks yellow. Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes, and responds to inputs from On/Off Button and programmed Backlight button only. Note:

The radio is unable to receive any call, including emergency calls, in locked state. The use of Emergency footswitch cancels password input to access radio. Unlocking the Radio from Locked State Do one of the following. Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when you power up. Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Steps 1 to 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. Power up the radio, if you have powered down the radio during locked state. A tone sounds and the yellow LED double blinks. The display shows Radio Locked. Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t Turning the Password Lock On or Off 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter a four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. 6 If the password is correct, do one of the following. Press display shows to enable Password Lock. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Password Lock. The 171 English to access the menu. to select. 7 If the password is incorrect:

The display shows Wrong Password and automatically returns to the previous menu. Changing the Password 1 2 3 4 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Passwd Lock and press to 5 Enter your current four-digit password via keypad microphone. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 6 Press to proceed. 172 English If the password is incorrect, the display shows Wrong Password, and automatically returns to the previous menu. 7 If the password entered in the previous step is correct, or to Change Pwd and press 8 Enter a new four-digit password via keypad microphone. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. 9 Re-enter the new four-digit password. See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. 10 to proceed. Press If the reentered password matches the new password entered earlier, the display shows Password Changed. If the reentered password does NOT match the new password entered earlier, the display shows Passwords Do Not Match. The screen automatically returns to the previous menu. Text Entry Configuration Word Correct Supplies alternative word choices when the word entered into the text editor is not recognized by the in-

built dictionary. You can configure the following settings for entering text on your radio:

Word Correct Word Predict Sentence Cap My Words Note:

Press previous screen. at any time to return to the at any time to return to the Long press Home screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Text Entry and press to to Word Correct and press You can also use option. or to change the selected i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 6 Do one of the following:

173 English Press display shows to enable Word Correct. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Correct. The Word Predict 5 or to select. to Word Predict and press You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Your radio can learn common word sequences that you often enter. It then predicts the next word you may want to use after you enter the first word of a common word sequence into the text editor. Press display shows to enable Word Predict. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Word Predict. The to access the menu. Sentence Cap or select. to Utilities and press to Automatically enables capitalization for the first letter in the first word for every new sentence. to Radio Settings and press or to select. 1 2 or select. to Text Entry and press to to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 1 2 3 4 174 English 3 4 5 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. to Text Entry and press to to Sentence Cap and press You can also use option. or to change the selected 6 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Sentence Cap. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Sentence Cap. The i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to List of Words and press or to select. Display shows the list of custom words. Viewing Custom Words Editing Custom Word You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. Your radio maintains a list to contain these words. You can edit the custom words saved in your radio. 1 to access the menu. 175 English 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 s e r u t a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to List of Words and press or to select. Display shows the list of custom words. Press to move one space to the left. Press right. or to move one space to the Press characters. to delete any unwanted Long press to change text entry method. 10 once your custom word is complete. Press The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. to the required word and press or to select. Adding Custom Words You can add your own custom words into your radios in-built dictionary. or to Edit and press to select. 1 to access the menu. 176 9 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. English or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Text Entry and press to method. Press completed. once your custom word is The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your custom word is being saved. If the custom word is saved, a tone sounds and the display shows positive mini notice. If the custom word is not saved, a low tone sounds and the display shows negative mini notice. to My Words and press to Deleting a Custom Word You can delete the custom words saved in your radio. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 2 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. to Add New Word and press or to select. Display shows the list of custom words. 7 Use the keypad to edit your custom word. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press 1 2 3 or to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to change text entry 177 English 4 5 6 7 or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to the required word and press or to select. or select. to Delete and press to 8 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Deleting All Custom Words You can delete all custom words from your radios in-

built dictionary. t s e r u a e F e n o h p o r c M d a p y e K i 178 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. or select. to Text Entry and press to to My Words and press to to Delete All and press to 7 Choose one of the following. At Delete Entry?, press The display shows All Entries Deleted. to select Yes. or to No and press to return to the previous screen. Front Panel Configuration (FPC) Your radio is able to customize certain feature parameters to enhance the use of your radio. Entering FPC Mode Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Utilities and press to to Program Radio and press 1 2 3 Editing FPC Mode Parameters Use the following buttons as required while navigating through the feature parameters.

,

,

, Scroll through options, increase/decrease values, or navigate vertically. Select the option or enter a sub-menu. Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen. i K e y p a d M c r o p h o n e F e a u r e s t 179 English Connect Plus Operations s n o i t a r e p O s u P l t c e n n o C 180 English Additional Radio Controls in Connect Plus Mode Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button The PTT button on the side of the radio (

two basic purposes:

) serves While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 196). If the Talk Permit Tone is enabled, wait until the short alert tone ends before talking. Programmable Buttons Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as shortcuts to radio functions depending on the duration of a button press:

Short press Long press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Pressing and holding for the programmed duration. Press and hold Keeping the button pressed. Note:

The programmed duration of a button press is applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or settings. See Emergency Operation on page 222 for more information on the programmed duration of the Emergency button. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 181 English A Assignable Radio Functions Manual Dial Bluetooth Audio Switch Busy Queue Cancellation e d o M s u P l Toggles audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Exits the busy mode when a non-Emergency call in the Busy Queue was initiated. Emergency calls, once accepted into the Busy Queue, cannot be cancelled. Selects the call log list. Provides direct access to the Contacts list. programming, initiates or cancels an emergency. Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Toggles intelligent audio on or off. Call Log Contacts Emergency On/Off Depending on the t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i Horns/Lights Intelligent Audio l a n o i t i d d A 182 English Depending on the programming, initiates a Private or Phone Call by keying in any subscriber ID or phone number. Radio Enable Privacy Radio Check One Touch Access Directly initiates a predefined Private Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message. Toggles privacy on or off. Determines if a radio is active in a system. Allows a target radio to be remotely enabled. Allows a target radio to be remotely disabled. Turns on the microphone of a target radio without it giving any indicators. Requests to search for a different site. Toggles scan on or off. Remote Monitor Roam Request Radio Disable Scan Site Lock On/Off When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Selects the text message menu. Plays zone and channel announcement voice messages for the current channel. This function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled. Toggles voice announcement on or off. Allows selection from a list of zones. Text Message Voice Announcement for Channel Voice Announcement On/Off Zone All Tones/Alerts Backlight Brightness Channel Up/

Down Display Mode Global Positioning System (GPS) Power Level Unassigned Toggles all tones and alerts on or off. Adjusts the brightness level. A d d i t i o n a l Depending on the programming, changes channel to previous or next channel. Toggles the day/night display mode on or off. Toggles the satellite navigation system on or off. Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Indicates that the button function has not yet been assigned. i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Assignable Settings or Utility Functions AF Suppressor Toggles the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor feature on or off. Identifying Status Indicators in Connect Plus Mode Display Icons 183 English The following are icons that appear on the display of the radio. Radio is set at Low power or Radio is set at High power. Received Signal Strength Indicator

(RSSI) The number of bars displayed repre-

sents the radio signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving. Bluetooth The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no remote Bluetooth device con-

nected. Bluetooth Connected The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a remote Bluetooth device is connected. Notification List has items to review. Power Level or Tones Disable Tones are turned off. Option Board The Option Board is enabled. Option Board Non-Function The Option Board is disabled. GPS/GNSS Available The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when a position fix is avail-

able. GPS/GNSS Not Available/Out of Range The GPS/GNSS feature is enabled but is not receiving data from the satellite. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 184 English Scan Scan feature is enabled. Emergency Radio is in Emergency mode. Secure The Privacy feature is enabled. Unsecure The Privacy feature is disabled. Call Icons Wi-Fi Average[6]

Wi-Fi signal is average. Wi-Fi Poor[6]

Wi-Fi signal is poor. Wi-Fi Unavailable[6]

Wi-Fi signal is unavailable. Site Roaming The site roaming feature is enabled. The following icons appear on the radios display during a call. These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate ID type. Private Call Indicates a Private Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indicates a sub-

scriber alias (name) or ID (number). Wi-Fi Excellent[6]

Wi-Fi signal is excellent. Wi-Fi Good[6]

Wi-Fi signal is good. 6 Only applicable for XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 185 English Group Call/Site All Call Indicates a Group Call or Site All Call in progress. In the Contacts list, it indi-

cates a group alias (name) or ID

(number). Phone Call as Private Call Indicates a Phone Call as Private Call in progress. Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatch-

er PC through a third-party Text Mes-

sage Server. Advanced Menu Icons The following icons appear beside menu items that offer a choice between two options or as an indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options. Checkbox (Empty) Indicates the option is not selected. Checkbox (Checked) Indicates the option is selected. Solid Black Box Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a sub-menu. Sent Item Icons The following icons appear at the top right corner of the radios display in the Sent Items folder. Sent Successfully The text message is sent successfully. OR Bluetooth Device Icons The following icons also appear next to items in the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i l a n o i t i d d A 186 English Bluetooth Data Device Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner. Bluetooth Audio Device Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset. Bluetooth PTT Device Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only Device (POD). LED Indicator The LED indicator (

your radio.

) shows the operational status of Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low battery condition, receiving an emergency transmission or has failed the self-

test upon powering up, or has moved out of range if radio is config-

ured with Auto-Range Transponder System. Radio is receiving over-the-air file transfer (Option Board firmware file, Network Frequency file or Option Board Codeplug file) or upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file. Radio is receiving a Call Alert, re-

ceived a text message or Scan is en-

abled and is receiving activity. Blinking green and yellow Rapidly blinking red A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 187 English A Solid yellow Radio is in Bluetooth Discoverable Mode. Radio is actively searching for a new site. Double blinking yel-

low Blinking yel-

low e d o M s u P l Radio is receiving a Call Alert or Scan is enabled and is idle (radio will remain muted to any activity). Solid green Radio is powering up or transmitting. Blinking green Double blinking green Radio is powering up, receiving a non-privacy- enabled call or data. Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. Indicator Tones High pitched tone Low pitched tone t c e n n o C n l i s o r t n o C o d a R i Alert Tones Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the status, or response to data received on the radio. Continuous Tone Periodic Tone Repetitive Tone Momentary Tone A monotone sound. Sounds continuously un-

til termination. Sounds periodically de-

pending on the duration set by the radio. Tone starts, stops, and repeats itself. A single tone that re-

peats itself until it is ter-

minated by the user. Sounds only once for a short period of time de-

fined by the radio. Positive Indicator Tone Negative Indicator Tone Switching Between Connect Plus and Non-

Connect Plus Modes To switch to a non-Connect Plus mode, you must change to another zone, if programmed by your l a n o i t i d d A 188 English dealer or system administrator. Check with your dealer or system administrator to see if your radio has been programmed with non-Connect Plus zones, and what features are available while operating in non-

Connect Plus zones. A d d i t i o n a l i R a d o C o n t r o s i l n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 189 English Making and Receiving Calls in Connect Plus Mode Press the programmed Roam Request button. You hear a tone, indicating the radio has switched to a new site. The display shows Site ID <Site Number>. Selecting a Site Site Lock On/Off A site provides coverage for a specific area. A Connect Plus site has a site controller and a maximum of 15 repeaters. In a multi-site network, the Connect Plus radio will automatically search for a new site when the signal level from the current site drops to an unacceptable level. Roam Request A Roam Request tells the radio to search for a different site, even if the signal from the current site is acceptable. If there are no sites available, The radio display shows Searching and continues to search through the list of sites. The radio will return to the previous site, if the previous site is still available. Note:

This is programmed by your dealer. When toggled on, the radio searches the current site only. When toggled off, the radio searches other sites in addition to the current site. Press the programmed Site Lock button. You hear a positive indicator tone, indicating the radio has locked to the current site. The display shows Site Locked. You hear a negative indicator tone, indicating the radio is unlocked. The display shows Site Unlocked. Site Restriction Your Connect Plus radio system administrator has the ability to decide which network sites your radio is and is not allowed to use. Your radio does not need to be reprogrammed to change the list of allowed and disallowed sites. If your radio attempts to register at a disallowed site, you see a brief message stating:

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 190 English Site <number given> Not Allowed. The radio then searches for a different network site. Selecting a Zone Radio Con-

trols Steps 2 The radio can be programmed with a maximum of 16 Connect Plus Zones and each Connect Plus zone contains a maximum of 16 assignable positions on the Channel Selector Knob. Each assignable knob position can be used to start one of the following voice call types:

Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Private Call 1 Access the Zone feature by performing one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Zone button Radio menu Steps Press the programmed Zone button. 1 to access the menu. or to Zone and press to select. The current zone is displayed and indicated by a

. 2 Select the required zone. Radio Control Steps or or and scroll to the required zone. 3 to select. Press The display shows <Zone> Selected momentarily and returns to the selected zone screen. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Using Multiple Networks If your radio has been programmed to use multiple Connect Plus networks, you can select a different 191 English network by switching to the Connect Plus zone that is assigned to the desired network. These network-to-

zone assignments are configured by your dealer through radio programming. Selecting a Call Type Use the Channel Selector Knob to select a call type. This can be a Group Call, Multi-group Call, Site All Call or Private Call, depending on how your radio is programmed. If you change the Channel Selector Knob to a different position (that has a call type assigned to it), this causes the radio to re-register with the Connect Plus site. The radio registers with the Registration Group ID that has been programmed for the new Channel Selector Knob position call type. If you select a position that has no call type assigned to it, your radio sounds a continuous tone and the display shows Unprogrammed. Your radio does not operate when selected to an unprogrammed channel, use the Channel Selector Knob to select a programmed channel instead. Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple zones in your radio), turn the programmed Channel Selector Knob to select the call type. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once the channel, subscriber ID or call type is displayed, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green when the radio is receiving. Note:

The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and double blinks green when the radio is receiving a privacy-enabled call. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must have the same Privacy Key, OR the same Key Value and Key ID (programmed by your dealer), as the transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call from). Note:

See Privacy on page 239 for more information. Receiving and Responding to a Group Call To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 192 English When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen), the LED blinks green.The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays the group call alias. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio's speaker. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. The LED lights up solid green. subscriber alias or ID, and the RSSI icon. The second line displays Private Call and the Private Call icon. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the speaker of the radio. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for one of the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Note:

See Making a Group Call on page 196 for details on making a Group Call. Receiving and Responding to a Private Call A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. When you receive a Private Call, the LED blinks green. The first line of the display shows the 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. See Making a Private Call on page 197 for details on making a Private Call. Receiving a Site All Call A Site All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the site. It is used to make important announcements requiring the users full attention. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 193 English When you receive an Site All Call, a tone sounds and the LED blinks green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays Site All Call. Your radio unmutes and the incoming call sounds through the radio speaker. Once the Site All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous screen before receiving the call. A Site All Call does not wait for a predetermined period of time before ending. You cannot respond to an Site All Call. Note:

See Making a Site All Call on page 197 for details on making a Site All Call. Note:

The radio stops receiving the Site All Call if you switch to a different channel while receiving the call. During a Site All Call, you will not be able to use any programmed button functions until the call ends. Receiving an Inbound Private Phone Call When you receive an Inbound Private Phone Call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Phone Call. 1 Press and hold the PTT button to answer and talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making a Buffered Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits and press the button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 194 English followed by within 2 seconds to Press insert a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the entered digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making a Live Over-Dial in an Inbound Phone Private Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows Phone Call. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the Live Dial digits. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display returns to the Phone Call screen. The display shows Phone Call Ended. Receiving an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Talkgroup Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Call1. Press the PTT button to talk and release it to listen. Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call When you receive an Inbound Phone Multi-Group Call, the Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Multigroup Call. The radio unmutes and the incoming multi-group call sounds through the radio's speaker. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 195 English Making a Radio Call Making a Call with the Channel Selector Knob After selecting your channel, you can select a subscriber alias or ID, or group alias or ID by using:

The Channel Selector Knob. A programmed One Touch Access button The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Private Call to a predefined ID easily. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one ID assigned to a One Touch Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Access buttons programmed. The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 214). Note:

Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on the channel to send a privacy-

enabled transmission. Only target radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Note:

See Privacy on page 239 for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 196 English Making a Group Call To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that group. 1 Select the channel with the active group alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 192. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the group call alias. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green, the radio unmutes and the response sounds through the radios speaker. You see the Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias or ID on your display. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the call. Making a Private Call While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call. You will hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private Call via the One Touch Access button, or the Channel Selector Knob, if this feature is not enabled. 1 Do one of the following. Select the channel with the active subscriber alias or ID. See Selecting a Call Type on page 192. Press the programmed One Touch Access button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears on the top right corner. The first text line shows the target subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone and see negative mini notice on the display. Making a Site All Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the site that are currently not engaged in another call. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 197 English Users on the channel/site cannot respond to an Site All Call. 1 Select the channel with the active Site All Call group alias. See Selecting a Call Type on page 192. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows Site All Call. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Multi-group Call This feature allows you to transmit to all users on multiple groups. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Note:

Users on the groups cannot respond to a Multi-group Call. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 198 English 1 Turn the Channel Selector Knob to select the Multi-group alias or ID. 2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Multi-group alias or ID. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. Making a Private Call with a One Touch Call Button Note:

Programmable buttons press must be initiated from the Home screen. The One Touch Call feature allows you to easily make a Private Call to a pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. This feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button press. You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch Call button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch Call buttons programmed. 1 Press the programmed One Touch Call button to make a Private Call to the pre-defined Private Call alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Use the keypad to enter a subscriber alias or Private ID. 3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the Private Call alias or ID. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. Making a Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button Making a Private Call 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. The display shows Number:. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text line displays the call status. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Making an Outbound Private Phone Call with the Programmable Manual Dial Button 1 Press the programmed Manual Dial button to enter into the Manual Dial screen. 199 English The display shows Number:. 2 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and to place a call to the entered number. press Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 3 Long press to end the call. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 200 English The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call via the Phone Menu 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Phone and press to select. to select Manual Dial. Press The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 4 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and to place a call to the entered number. press Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If an invalid telephone number is selected, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 5 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Making an Outbound Private Phone Call from Contacts Note:

If the Phone Manual Dial is disabled in MOTOTRBO Connect Plus Option Board CPS, the Phone Number item will not be displayed in the Menu. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to Manual Dial and press to to Phone Number and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Number, the second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. 5 Use the keypad to enter a telephone number, and press to place a call to the entered number. If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 201 English If successful, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. If unsuccessful, the display shows a negative mini notice, Phone Call Failed, Resource Not Available, or Invalid Permissions. is pressed with no telephone number If entered, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone then a negative indicator tone. The display remains the same. 6 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. Long press The display returns to the previous screen. to end the call. Making a Buffered Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Use the keypad to enter the digits. Waiting for the Channel Grant in an Outbound Private Phone Call When you make a Private Phone Call, the first line of the display shows Phone Call. The second line of the display shows the dialed telephone number. When the call is connected, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first line of the display shows the telephone number. Press to delete any unwanted characters. Press within 2 seconds to insert followed by a pause. The P replaces * and # on the display. The first text line of the display shows Extra Digits, the second text line of the display shows the entered extra digits. 2 Press the button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s l l i i a C g n v e c e R d n a g n k a M i 202 English If the PTT button is pressed, the display shows a negative mini notice, Press OK to Send and returns to the previous screen. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 3 Do one of the following. Press to return to the Phone Call screen. Long press to end the call. Making a Live Over-Dial in a Connected Outbound Private Phone Call During the call, the Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number. 1 Press the PTT button and use the keypad to enter the digits. The Phone Call as Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first text line of the display shows the telephone number with the over-dial digits appended. 2 to end the call. Long press The first line of the display shows Ending. The second line of the display shows Phone Call.... The display shows Phone Call Ended. M a k n g i a n d R e c e v n g C a i i l l s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 203 English Advanced Features in Connect Plus Mode Auto Fallback Auto Fallback is a system feature that allows you to continue to make and receive non-emergency calls on the selected Group Contact in the event of certain types of Connect Plus system failures. If one of these failures occurs, your radio attempts to roam to a different Connect Plus site. This search process may result in your radio finding an operable Connect Plus site, or it may result in your radio finding a Fallback Channel (if your radio is enabled for Auto Fallback). A Fallback Channel is a repeater that is normally part of an operable Connect Plus site, but is currently unable to communicate with either its site controller or the Connect Plus network. In Fallback mode, the repeater operates as a single digital repeater. Auto Fallback Mode supports non-

emergency Group Calls only. No other call types are supported in Fallback Mode. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 204 English Indications of Auto Fallback Mode When your radio is using a Fallback channel, you hear the intermittent Fallback Tone approximately once every 15 seconds (except while transmitting). The display periodically shows a brief message, Fallback Channel. Your radio only permits PTT on the selected Group Contact (Group Call, Multigroup Call, or Site All Call). It does not allow you to make other types of calls. Making/Receiving Calls in Fallback Mode Note:

Calls are heard only by radios that are monitoring the same Fallback channel and selected to the same Group. Calls are not networked to other sites or other repeaters. Emergency voice calls or Emergency Alerts are not available in Fallback mode. If you press the emergency button in Fallback mode, the radio provides an invalid key press tone. Display-equipped radios also show the message, Feature not available. Private (radio to radio) and Phone calls are not available in Fallback mode. If you attempt a call to a private contact, you will receive a denial tone. At this point you should select a desired group contact. Other non-supported calls include Remote Monitor, Call Alert, Radio Check, Radio Enable, Radio Disable, Text messaging, Location Updates, and packet data calls. Enhanced Traffic Channel Access (ETCA) is not supported in Auto Fallback mode. If two or more radio users press PTT at the same time

(or at almost the same time), it is possible that both radios transmit until PTT is released. In this event, it is possible that none of the transmissions will be understood by receiving radios. Making calls in Fallback mode is similar to normal functioning. Simply select the group contact you wish to use (using the radios normal channel selection method), and then press the PTT to start your call. It is possible that the channel may be in use already by another group. If the channel is in use, you receive a busy tone and the display will say Channel Busy. You may select Group, Multi-group or Site All Call contacts using your radios normal channel selection method. While the radio is operating on the Fallback Channel, the Multigroup operates just like other Groups. It is only heard by radios that are currently selected to the same Multi-group. Returning to Normal Operation If the site returns to normal trunking operation while you are in range of your Fallback repeater, your radio automatically exits Auto Fallback mode. You hear a registration beep when the radio successfully registers. If you are in the range of an operable site

(that is not in Fallback mode), you may press the Roam Request button (if programmed for your radio) to force your radio to search for and register on an available site. If no other site is available, your radio returns to Auto Fallback mode after searching is complete. If you drive out of coverage of your Fallback repeater, your radio enters Search mode

(display indicates Searching). Radio Check If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio. This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 205 English Sending a Radio Check 1 Access the Radio Check feature. Steps Radio Control Program-

med Ra-

dio Check button Menu e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 206 English 2 1 2 3 4 1 Press the programmed Radio Check button. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. or to the required subscriber alias or ID and press to select. or and press to Radio Check to select. The display shows the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If the target radio is active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Available. If the target radio is not active in the system, a tone sounds and the display briefly shows Target Radio Not Available. Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen when initiated via Menu. Radio returns to the Home Screen if initiated via the programmable button. Remote Monitor Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a target radio (subscriber alias or IDs only). The green LED will blink once on the target subscriber. You can use this feature to monitor, remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio. Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature. Radio Control Steps Initiating Remote Monitor Note:

Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed duration or when there is any attempt to initiate transmission, change channels or power down the radio. 1 Access the Remote Monitor feature. Steps Radio Control Program-

med Re-

mote Monitor Button Menu 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button. or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and press to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 3 4 5 or to the required sub-

scriber alias or ID and press to select. or and press or and press to Manual Dial to select. to Remote Mon. to select. The first text line shows Rem. Monitor. The second text line displays the Target Alias, indicating the request is in progress. The LED lights up blinking green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Rem. Monitor Successful. Your radio starts playing audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration and display shows Rem. Monitor, followed by 207 English target alias. Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and the LED turns off. If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone the display shows Rem. Monitor Failed. Scan This feature allows your radio to monitor and join calls for groups defined in a pre-programmed scan list. When scan is enabled, the scan icon appears on the status bar and the LED blinks yellow when idle. Starting and Stopping Scan Note:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all Connect Plus zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See Editing the Scan List on page 210 for more information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 208 English You can start and stop scanning by pressing the programmed Scan button OR follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and press or to select. The display shows Scan On if scan is enabled. The Scan menu shows Turn Off if scan is enabled. The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. The Scan menu shows Turn On if scan is disabled. Responding to a Transmission During a Scan During scanning, your radio stops on a group where activity is detected. The radio continuously listens for any member in the scan list when idle on the control channel. 1 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The LED lights up solid green. 3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns to scanning other groups. Scan can be turned on or off from the menu or by pressing a programmed Scan On/Off button. This feature functions only when the radio is not currently involved in a call. If you are presently listening to a call, your radio cannot scan for other group calls, and is therefore unaware they are in progress. Once your call is finished, your radio returns to the control channel time slot and is able to scan for groups that are in the scan list. Turning Scan On or Off User Configurable Scan If the Edit List menu is enabled, a user is able to Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multi-group or Site All Call/Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone's Scan List. Note:

This procedure turns the Scan feature On or Off for all zones with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone. It is important to note that even when the Scan feature is turned on via this procedure, scan may still be disabled for some (or all) groups on your scan list. See the next section for more information. If Scan is turned on, the Scan icon appears on your display. When Scan is on and you are not participating in a call, the LED blinks green and yellow. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 209 English The procedure for turning Scan on or off depends on how your radio is programmed. If programmed with a Scan On/Off button, use the button to toggle the feature on or off. If your radio has been programmed so that Scan can be turned on or off via the menu, follow the procedure described next. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to Scan and press to select. to Turn On or Turn Off and press or to select. The display shows Scan On momentarily if scan is disabled. The display shows Scan Off momentarily if scan is enabled. Editing the Scan List Note:

If the scan list entry happens to be the radios currently selected group, the radio listens for activity on this group regardless of whether the e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 210 English list entry currently shows a check mark or not. Whenever a radio is not in a call, the radio listens for activity on its Selected Group, Multigroup, the Site All Call, and its Default Emergency Revert Group (if configured for one). This operation cannot be disabled. If Scan is enabled the radio will also listen for activity on enabled Zone Scan List members. Your scan list determines which groups can be scanned. The list is created when your radio is programmed. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can, Enable/disable scan for individual groups on the list. Add and Remove the scan members from the Add Member menu. Refer to Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu on page 211. Note:

A Scan List member must be a regular Group Contact (i.e. not Multigroup or Site All Call/

Network Wide All Call) that is currently assigned to a Channel Selector position in a Connect Plus Zone with the same Network ID as the currently selected Zone. 1 2 3 4 The Talkgroup alias must not match any Talkgroup that has been included in the current Zone's Scan List. to access the menu. to View/Edit List and press or to select. or to the desired Group name. If a check mark precedes the Group name, then scan is currently enabled for this Group. If there is no check mark preceding the Group name, then scan is currently disabled for this Group. to select the desired Group. The display shows Enable if scan is currently disabled for the Group. The display shows Disable if scan is currently enabled for the Group. 5 Select the displayed option (Enable or Disable) to select. and press Depending on which option was selected, the radio momentarily displays Scan Enabled or Scan Disabled as confirmation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e The radio displays the Zone scan list again. If scan was enabled for the Group, the check mark displays before the Group name. If scan was disabled for the Group, the check mark is removed before the Group name. Add or Delete a Group via the Add Members Menu The Connect Plus radio does not allow a duplicate group number or a duplicate group alias to be placed on a zone scan list (or to be shown as a scan candidate). Thus, the list of scan candidates described in steps 6 and 7 sometimes changes after adding or deleting a group from the zone scan list. If your radio has been programmed to allow you to edit the scan list, you can use the Add Members menu to add a group to the scan list of the currently 211 English selected zone, or to delete a group from the san list of the currently selected zone. 5 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Scan option and press to to <Add Members> and press or to select. The display shows Add Members from Zone n (n

= the Connect Plus zone number of the first Connect Plus zone in your radio with the same Network ID as your currently selected zone). 4 Do one of the following. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in that zone, go to step 6. If the group you want to add to the scan list is assigned to a channel selector position in a different Connect Plus zone, go to step 5. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 212 English or to scroll a list of Connect Plus zones that have the same Network ID as the currently selected zone. to select. 6 After locating the Connect Plus zone where the desired group is assigned to a channel selector position, press Your radio displays the first entry in a list of groups assigned to a channel position in that zone. The groups on the list are called scan candidates, because they can be added to the scan list of your currently selected zone (or they are already on the zone scan list). If the zone does not have any groups that can be added to the scan list, the radio displays No Candidates. 7 or to scroll through the list of candidate groups. If a plus sign (+) is displayed immediately before the group alias, this indicates the group is currently on the scan list for the selected zone. 8 9 If the plus sign (+) is not displayed immediately before the alias, the group is not currently on the scan list, but can be added. when the desired group alias is Press displayed. If this group is not currently on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Add (Group Alias) message is displayed. If this group is already on the scan list for the currently selected zone, the Delete (Group Alias) message is displayed. to accept the displayed message (Add Press or Delete). If deleting a group from the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will no longer display immediately before the alias. If adding a group to the list, you will know the operation is successful because the plus sign (+) will display before the alias. If you are attempting to add a group, and the list is already full, the radio displays List Full. If this should occur, it will be necessary to delete a group from the scan list prior to adding a new one. 10 When finished, press necessary to return to the desired menu. as many times as A d v a n c e d F e a t Understanding Scan Operation Note:

If the Radio joins a call for a Zone Scan List member from a different Zone and Call Hang Timer expires before you are able to respond, in order to respond, you must navigate to the Zone and Channel of the Scan List Member and start a new call. There are some circumstances in which you can miss calls for groups that are in your scan list. When you miss a call for one of the following reasons, this does not indicate a problem with your radio. This is a normal scan operation for Connect Plus. Scan feature is not turned on (check for the scan icon on the display). Scan list member has been disabled via the menu

(see Editing the Scan List on page 210). You are participating in a call already. u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 213 English No member of the scanned group is registered at your site (Multisite systems only). Scan Talkback If your radio scans into a call from the selectable group scan list, and if the PTT button is pressed during the scanned call, the operation of the radio depends on whether Scan Talkback was enabled or disabled during radio programming. For more information on how your radio is programmed, contact your radio dealer (or your radio system administrator). Scan Talkback Disabled Scan Talkback Enabled The radio leaves the scanned call and attempts to transmit on the contact for the currently selected channel position. After the Call Hang Time on the currently selected contact expires, the radio returns to the home channel and starts the Scan Hang Time Timer. The radio resumes group scan after its Scan Hang Time Timer expires. If the PTT button is pressed during the Group Hang Time of the scanned call, e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 214 English the radio attempts to transmit to the scanned group. Note:

If you scan into a call for a group that is not assigned to a channel position in the currently selected zone and you miss the Hang Time of the call, switch to the proper zone and then select the channel position of the group to talk back to that group. Contacts Settings Note:

You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for Connect Plus Contacts. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be performed by your dealer. If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can make a privacy-enabled voice call on that channel. Only target radios with the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the transmission. Contacts provide address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate a call. Each zone provides a Contact List with up to 100 contacts. The following contact types are available:

Private Call Group Call Multigroup Call Site All Call Voice Site All Call Text Dispatch Call The Dispatch Call contact type is used to send a text message to a dispatcher PC through a third-party Text Message Server. Making a Private Call from Contacts The LED lights up solid green. 5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green and the display shows the transmitting user's ID. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Contacts and press select. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. Making a Call Alias Search to You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the required subscriber alias. This feature is only applicable while in Contacts. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to 215 English A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e The entries are alphabetically sorted. Adding a New Contact 3 Key in the first character of the required alias, and then press alias. or to locate the required 4 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The LED lights up solid green. The display shows the destination alias. 6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled), and speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio responds, the LED blinks green. If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of time, the call ends. The display shows Call Ended. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Contacts and press to to New Contact and press to 4 Use the keypad to enter the contact number and press to confirm. 5 Use the keypad to enter the contact name and press to confirm. 6 If adding a Radio Contact, required ringer type and press The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display shows Contact Saved. to select. to the or e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 216 English Call Indicator Settings Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alert You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call Alert. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alert and press to to Call Ringers and press to Call Alert and press to The current tone is indicated by a

. 7 or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. A d v a n c e d F e a t Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Private Calls You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private Call. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 217 English 5 6 7 e d o M s u P l or to select. or to select. to Call Ringers and press to Private Call and press to enable/disable the Private Call beside Enabled, if Private Press ringing tones. The display shows Call ringing tones are enabled. The tones are disabled. is not displayed when Private Call ringing Activating and Deactivating Call Ringers for Text Message You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text Message. 3 4 5 6 7 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or to select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Call Ringers and press to Text Message and press or to select. The current tone is indicated by a

. or to select. to the required tone and press appears beside selected tone. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to Escalating Alarm Tone Volume You can program your radio to continually alert you when a radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is known as Escalert. t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 218 English Call Log Features Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and manage recent calls. You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:

Delete View Details Viewing Recent Calls The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to or to preferred list and press to select. The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the list. 4 or to view the list. Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current selected alias or ID. Deleting a Call from a Call List A d v a n c e d F e a t 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Call Log and press to u r e s i n C o n n e c t to the required list and press or to select. When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). l P u s M o d e to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 219 English 5 or select. to Delete and press to 6 Do one of the following:

5 to View Details and press or to select. Display shows details. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A Press The display shows Entry Deleted. to select Yes to delete the entry. or to No, and press the button to return to the previous screen. Viewing Details from a Call List 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or to select. to Call Log and press to to the required list and press to the required alias or ID and press or to select. 220 English Call Alert Operation Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call you back when they are able to do so. This feature is accessible through the menu via Contacts, manual dial or a programmed One Touch Access button. Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the display. When you hear a repetitive tone and the LED blinks yellow, do one of the following:

Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call. Press alert is moved to the Missed Call Log. to exit the Notification List. The See Notification List on page 248 for details about the Notification List. See Call Log Features on page 219 for details about the Missed Call List. Making a Call Alert from the Contact List 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Contacts and press to 4 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID:

select the subscriber alias directly or to the required subscriber alias and press to select. use the Manual Dial menu to Manual Dial and press or to select. The Manual Dial text entry screen shall be displayed. Enter the Subscriber ID and press

. or to Call Alert and press to select. The display shows Call Alert: <Subscriber Alias or ID>Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make a Call Alert to the predefined alias. The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent. 221 English The LED lights up solid green when your radio is sending the Call Alert. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display shows Call Alert Successful. If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the display shows Call Alert Failed. Emergency Operation Note:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice emergency initiation, in most cases it automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call or Emergency Alert is finished. The exception to this rule is when Emergency Alert is the configured Emergency Mode and Silent is the configured Emergency Type. If your radio is programmed in this manner, the silent operation continues until you cancel silent operation by pressing PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. Emergency voice calls and Emergency Alerts are not supported when operating in Connect Plus Auto Fallback mode. For more e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 222 English information see the Auto Fallback on page 204. An Emergency Alert is used to indicate a critical situation. You can initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen display, even when there is activity on the current channel. Pressing the Emergency button initiates the programmed Emergency mode. The programmed Emergency mode may also be initiated by triggering the optional Man Down feature. The Emergency feature may be disabled in your radio. Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is similar with all other buttons:

Short press Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds. Long press Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds. The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/Off feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of the Emergency button. If the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. If the long press for the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the Emergency mode, then the short press for the Emergency button is assigned to exit the Emergency mode. When your radio is selected to a Connect Plus zone, it supports three Emergency modes:

Emergency Call Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Emergency Alert You must press the PTT button to talk on the assigned emergency time slot. For the first transmission on the assigned emergency time slot, the microphone is automatically unmuted and you may talk without pressing the PTT button. The microphone stays hot in this fashion for a time period programmed into the radio. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. An Emergency Alert is not a voice call. It is an emergency notification that is sent to radios that are configured to receive these alerts. The radio sends an emergency alert via the control channel of the currently registered site. The Emergency Alert is received by radios in the Connect Plus network that are programmed to receive them (no matter which network site they are registered to). Only one of the Emergency Modes can be assigned to the Emergency button per zone. In addition, each Emergency mode has the following types:

Regular Silent Silent with Voice Radio initiates an Emergency and shows audio and/or visual indicators. Radio initiates an Emergency without any audio or visual indicators. The radio suppresses all audio or visual indications of the Emergency until you press the PTT button to start a voice transmission. The same as Silent operation, except that the radio also unmutes for some voice transmissions. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 223 English Receiving an Incoming Emergency Saving the Emergency Details to the Alarm List Your radio may be programmed to sound an alert tone and also display information about the incoming Emergency. If so programmed, upon receiving the incoming Emergency, the display shows the Emergency Details screen with the emergency icon, the Alias or ID of the radio that requested the Emergency, the Group Contact being used for the Emergency, and one additional line of information. The additional information is the name of the zone that contains the Group Contact. At the present time, the radio displays only the most recently decoded Emergency. If a new Emergency is received before the prior Emergency is cleared, the details for the new Emergency replace the details of the previous Emergency. Depending on how your radio has been programmed, the Emergency Details screen (or Alarm List screen) will stay on your radios display even after the Emergency ends. You can save the emergency details to the Alarm List, or you can delete the emergency details as described in the following sections. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 224 English Saving the emergency details to the Alarm List allows you to view the details again at a later time by selecting Alarm List from the Main Menu. 1 While the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen is displayed, press The Exit Alarm List screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

to save the Select Yes and press emergency details to the Alarm List, and to exit the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Select No and press to return to the Emergency Details (or Alarm List) screen. Deleting the Emergency Details 1 While the Emergency Details screen is displayed, press The Delete screen displays. 2 Perform one of the following actions:

Select Yes and press emergency details. Select No and press Emergency Details screen. to delete the to return to the Responding to an Emergency Call Note:

If you do not respond to the Emergency Call within the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time, the Emergency call will end. If you want to speak to the group after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires, you must first select the channel position assigned to the group (if not already selected). Then, press PTT to start a non-Emergency Call to the group. 1 When receiving an Emergency Call, press any button to stop all Emergency Call received indications. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. All radios that are monitoring this group hear your transmission. 4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone. The LED lights up green. 5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency initiating radio responds, the LED blinks green. You see the Group Call icon, the group ID, and transmitting radio ID on your display. Responding to an Emergency Alert Note:

The Group contact used for the Emergency Alert should not be used for voice communication. This could prevent other radios from sending and receiving Emergency Alerts on the same group. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e An Emergency Alert from a radio indicates that the user is in an urgent situation. You may respond to the alert by initiating a private call to the radio who declared the emergency, initiating a group call to a 225 English designated talk group, sending the radio a Call Alert, initiating a Remote Monitor of that radio, etc. The proper response is determined by your organization and the individual situation. Initiating an Emergency Call Note:

If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode until you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission. If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not initially display any audio or visual indicators that the radio is in Emergency mode. However, your radio unmutes for the transmissions of radios responding to your emergency. The emergency indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission from your radio. For both Silent and Silent with Voice operation, the radio automatically exits silent operation after the Emergency Call is finished. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 226 English 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to initiate a voice transmission on the Emergency group. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call continues for the time allotted for the Emergency Call Hang Time. If you press the PTT button during this time, the Emergency call continues. Initiating an Emergency Call with Voice to Follow Your radio must be programmed for this type of operation. When enabled for this operation, when you press the programmed Emergency button, and when your radio receives the time slot assignment, the microphone is automatically activated without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. The hot mic applies to the first voice transmission from your radio during the Emergency call. For subsequent transmissions in the same Emergency call, you must press the PTT button. 1 Press the programmed Emergency button. 2 Hold the microphone 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 The microphone remains active for the hot mic time specified in your radio's codeplug programming. During this time, the LED lights up green. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk longer than the programmed duration. Initiating an Emergency Alert Note:

If your radio is programmed for Silent or Silent with Voice, it will not provide any audio or visual indications that it is sending an Emergency Alert. If programmed for Silent, the silent operation continues indefinitely until you press PTT or the button configured for Emergency Off. If programmed for Silent with Voice, the radio automatically cancels silent operation when the site controller broadcasts the Emergency Alert. Press the orange Emergency button. Upon transmitting the Emergency Alert to the site controller, the radios display shows the Emergency icon, the Group contact used for the Emergency Alert, and TX Alarm. Once the Emergency Alert is successfully sent and is being broadcast for other radios to hear, a positive indicator tone sounds and the radios display shows Alarm Sent. If the Emergency Alert is unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the radio displays Alarm Failed. Exiting Emergency Mode A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t Note:

If the Emergency call ends due to the expiration of the Emergency Hang Time, but the emergency condition is not over, press the Emergency button again to restart the process. l P u s M o d e If you initiate an Emergency Alert by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio automatically exits Emergency mode after receiving a response from the Connect Plus system. If you initiate an Emergency call by pressing the programmed Emergency button, your radio will be 227 English assigned a channel automatically when one becomes available. Once your radio has transmitted a message indicating the emergency, you cannot cancel your Emergency call. However, if you pressed the button by accident or the emergency no longer exists, you may wish to say this over the assigned channel. When you release the PTT button, the Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. If your radio was configured for Emergency with Voice to Follow, use the hot mic period to explain your error, then press and release the PTT button to discontinue the transmission. The Emergency call is discontinued after the Emergency Call Hang Time expires. Text Message Features Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message, from another radio or a text message application. The maximum length of characters for sending a text message, including the subject line (seen when receiving message from an e-mail application), depends on CPS configuration which can be configured up to maximum 280 characters. Your radio e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 228 English can receive a text message with maximum length of 280 characters. If user forwards a text message with characters more than the maximum length, the text message will be truncated to the maximum length. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Sending a Quick Text Message Your radio supports a maximum of 10 Quick Text messages as programmed by your dealer. While Quick Text messages are predefined, you can edit each message before sending it. If you are sending the message, select the recipient by to the required alias and press or to select. or to Manual Dial, and press to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231). Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch Access Button Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-

Send Text Messages on page 231). Accessing the Drafts Folder The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

You can edit saved text message before sending it. Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 165. Long press at any time to return to the Home screen. Viewing a Saved Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 229 English Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. A blinking cursor appears. 3 Use the keypad to type your message. to move one space to the left. Press key to move one space to the right. key to delete any unwanted Press the Press the characters. Long press method. to change text entry or 4 Press once message is composed. to Drafts and press to 5 Select the message recipient by or select. 2 3 to the required message and press or to select. Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to Edit and press to select. to the required alias and press or to select. to Manual Dial, and press or to select. The first line of the display shows Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press

. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 230 English The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the text message cannot be sent, it is moved to the Sent Items folder and marked with a Send Failed icon. 2 3 4 or select. to Drafts and press to to the required message and press or to select. or to Delete and press to delete the text message. Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. You can select one of the following options while at the Resend option screen:

Resend Forward Edit Resending a Text Message to resend the same message to the Press same subscriber/group alias or ID. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows the positive mini notice. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 231 English If the message cannot be sent, the display shows the negative mini notice. Forwarding a Text Message Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/group alias or ID. 1 2 or select. to Forward and press to to or Select the message recipient by the required alias or ID and press to select. The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. Managing Sent Text Messages Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent Items list. The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder. Note:

Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Sent Text Message 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program-

med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 232 English 2 3 or select. to Sent Items and press to to the required message and press or to select. The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message (see Sent Item Icons on page 186). Sending a Sent Text Message You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent text message:

Resend Forward Edit Delete 1 2 Press again while viewing the message. or to one of the following options and press to select. Option Forward Delete Resend Steps Select Forward to send the selected text message to another subscriber/

group alias or ID (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 232). Select Delete to delete the text message. Select Resend to resend the select-

ed text message to the same sub-

scriber/group alias or ID. The display shows Sending Mes sage, confirming that the same mes-

sage is being sent to the same tar-

get radio. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 233 English Option Steps Option Steps If the message fails to send, the ra-

dio returns you to the Resend option screen. Press to resend the message to the same subscriber/

group alias or ID. Note:

If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without provid-

ing any indication in the dis-

play or via sound. Note:

If the radio changes mode or powers down before the sta-

tus of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and au-

tomatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. Note:

The radio supports a maxi-

mum of five (5) In-Progress messages at one time. Dur-

ing this period, the radio cannot send any new mes-

sage and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. If you exit the message sending screen while the message is being sent, the radio updates the status of the message in the Sent Items folder without providing any indication in the display or via sound. If the radio changes mode or powers down before the status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the radio cannot complete any In-

Progress messages and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-

Progress messages at one time. During this e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 234 English period, the radio cannot send any new message and automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon. on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items 3 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing or select. to Delete All and press to Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 or to Sent Items and press to select. When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned 4 Choose one of the following. or or to Yes and press to select. The display shows positive mini notice. to No and press to return to the previous screen. Receiving a Text Message When your radio receives a message, the display shows the Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the Message icon. You can select one of the following options when receiving a text message:

Read Read Later Delete A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 235 English Reading a Text Message 1 or to Read? and press to select. Selected message in the Inbox opens. 2 Do one of the following:

Press to return to the Inbox. Press delete the text message. a second time to reply, forward, or Managing Received Text Messages Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages. Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the most recently received. Your radio supports the following options for text messages:

Reply (via Quick Text) Forward Delete Delete All Note:

If the channel type is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or delete all Received messages. Long press Home screen. at any time to return to the Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or or to Messages and press to to Inbox and press to select. toview the messages. 5 Do one of the following:

Press press that message. to select the current message, and again to reply, forward, or delete e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 236 English Long press to return to the Home screen. 4 Press once more to access the sub-menu. Replying to a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature. Radio Controls Program-

med Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Mes-

sage button. 1 2 to access the menu. or to Messages and press to select. 2 3 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. 5 Use your keypad to write/edit your message. 6 once message is composed. Press The display shows Sending Message, confirming your message is being sent. If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Message Sent. If the message cannot be sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Message Send Failed. If the message cannot be sent, the radio returns you to the Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages on page 231). Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing one of the following actions:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 237 English Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Steps Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. 2 3 4 5 6 or to Inbox and press to select. to the required message and press or to select. Press once more to access the sub-menu. 2 or select. to Delete and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Message Deleted, and the screen returns to the Inbox. Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox 1 Access the Text Message feature by performing Steps one of the following actions:

Radio Con-

trols Programmed Text Message button Menu Press the programmed Text Message button. 1 2 to access the menu. or and press to Messages to select. or to Inbox and press to select. When you select Inbox and it contains no text messages, the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are turned on e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 238 English

(see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 141). or select. to Delete All and press to or to Yes and press to select. The display shows Inbox Cleared. 3 4 Privacy If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a software-based scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification portions of a transmission are not scrambled. Your radio must have privacy enabled on the current channel selector position to send a privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacy-enabled channel selector position, the radio is still able to receive clear (unscrambled) transmissions. Your radio supports Enhanced Privacy. To unscramble a privacy-enabled call transmission, your radio must be programmed to have the same Key Value and Key ID (for Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio. If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different Key Value and Key ID, you hear nothing at all (Enhanced Privacy). If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the Home screen shows the Secure or Unsecure icon, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm. The LED lights up solid green while the radio is transmitting and blinks green rapidly when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacy-enabled transmission. You can access this feature by performing one of the following actions:

Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or off. Using the Radio Menu as described by the steps described next. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 239 English Note:

Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure icon appears on the status bar, except when the radio is sending or receiving an Emergency Alert. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings or or to Connect Plus and press or to select. or to Enhanced Privacy. If the display shows Turn On, press enable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. to to If the display shows Turn Off, press disable Privacy. The radio displays a message confirming your selection. Making a Privacy-Enabled (Scrambled) Call Toggle privacy on using the programmed privacy button or by using the menu. Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled for the currently selected channel position to send a privacy-enabled transmission. When privacy is enabled for the currently selected channel position, all voice transmissions made by your radio will be scrambled. This includes Group Call, Multigroup Call, talk-back during scanned calls, Site All Call, Emergency Call, and Private Call. Only receiving radios with the same Key Value and Key ID as your radio will be able to unscramble the transmission. Security You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example, you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 240 English Note:

Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to radios with these functions enabled. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Radio Disable 1 Access this feature by Steps Radio Controls Radio Dis-

able but-

ton Radio menu 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button. or to the required alias or ID and press lect. to se-

to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. Radio Controls Steps 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required sub-

scriber alias or ID:

Select the required alias or ID directly. or to the re-

quired alias or ID and to select. press Use the Manual Dial menu A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or to Manual to Dial and press select. or to Radio Number and press select. to 241 English Radio Controls Steps Radio Enable 1 Access this feature by The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the dis-

play shows a blinking cur-

sor. Use the keypad to en-

ter the subscriber alias or ID and press

. 4 or ble and press to Radio Disa to select. Radio Con-

trols Radio Enable button Radio menu The display shows Radio Disable: <Target Alias or ID> and the LED blinks green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Disable Failed. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 242 English Steps 2 1 2 1 Press the programmed Radio Ena-

ble button. or to the required alias or ID and press to select. to access the menu. or to Contacts and to select. The entries press are alphabetically sorted. 3 Use one of the steps described next to select the required subscriber alias or ID Select the required alias or ID di-

rectly. Steps Radio Con-

trols or to the required to alias or ID and press select. Use the Manual Dial menu or al and press to Manual Di to select. or to Radio Num to select. ber and press The first line of the display shows Radio Number:. The second line of the display shows a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to enter the sub-

scriber alias or ID and press

. Steps Radio Con-

trols 4 or and press to Radio Enable to select. The display shows Radio Enable: <Subscriber Alias or ID> and the LED lights up solid green. 2 Wait for acknowledgement. If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Successful. If not successful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the display shows Radio Enable Failed. Bluetooth Operation Note:

If disabled via the CPS, all Bluetooth-related features are disabled and the Bluetooth device database is erased. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 243 English This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetooth-enabled device (accessory) via a wireless Bluetooth connection. Your radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially available Off-The-

Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices. Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters (32 feet) line of sight. This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your Bluetooth-enabled device. It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high degree of reliability when they are separated. At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will start to sound garbled or broken. To correct this problem, simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer to each other (within the 10-meter/32 feet defined range) to re-establish clear audio reception. Your radios Bluetooth function has a maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-

meter/32 feet range. Your radio can support up to 4 simultaneous Bluetooth connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types. For example, a headset, and a PTT-Only Device (POD). Multiple connections with e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 244 English Bluetooth-enabled devices of the same type are not supported. Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual for more details on your Bluetooth-

enabled devices full capabilities. Turning Bluetooth On and Off 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to or to My Status and press to select. The display shows On and Off. The current status is indicated by a

. 4 Do one of the following:

or to On and press The display shows On and a the selected status. to select. appears left of or to Off and press The display shows Off and a the selected status. to select. appears left of Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press operation as this cancels the operation. during the finding and connecting 1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-

enabled devices user manual. 2 3 4 On your radio, press to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to 5 Do one of the following:

6 to the required device and press or to select. or to Find Devices to locate available devices. device and press to the required or to select. or to Connect and press to select. Display shows Connecting to <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. If successful, the radio display shows

<Device>Connected. A tone sounds and besides the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears on the status bar. If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting Failed. appears A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 245 English Note:

If pin code is required, use the same entry method as Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on page 170. Finding and Connecting from a Bluetooth Device

(Discoverable Mode) Do not turn off your Bluetooth or your radio during the finding and connecting operation as this may cancel the operation. 1 Turn Bluetooth On. See Turning Bluetooth On and Off on page 107. 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to or to Find Me and press to select. Your radio can now be found by other Bluetooth-

enabled devices for a programmed duration. This is called Discoverable Mode. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 246 English 5 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and pair it with your radio. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device 1 2 3 4 5 On your radio, press to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. or to Disconnect and press to select. Display shows Disconnecting from <Device>. Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled devices user manual. The radio display shows <Device> Disconnected. A positive indicator tone sounds and beside the connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon disappears on the status bar. disappears Switching Audio Route between Internal Radio Speaker and Bluetooth Device You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory. Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio. A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Bluetooth. Viewing Device Details 1 to access the menu. 2 3 4 5 or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. or to select. to View Details and press Deleting Device Name You can remove a disconnected device from the list of Bluetooth-enabled devices. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Bluetooth and press to A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 247 English or select. to Devices and press to to the required device and press or to select. 4 5 or to Delete and press to select. The display shows Device Deleted. Bluetooth Mic Gain Allows control of the connected Bluetooth-enabled devices microphone gain value. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Bluetooth and press to to BT Mic Gain and press to t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A or to the BT Mic Gain type and the current values. To edit values, press to select. or and press to increase or to decrease values to select. Notification List Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your unread events on the channel, such as unread text messages, missed calls, and call alerts. The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the Notification List has one or more events. The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread events. When it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event. Note:

After the events are read, they are removed from the Notification List. 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l 248 English Accessing the Notification List Turning Wi-Fi On or Off 1 2 3 to access the menu. or to select. to Notification and press to the required event and press or to select. Long press to return to the Home Screen. Wi-Fi Operation Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. The programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button is assigned via CPS. Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. You can turn on or turn off Wi-Fi by performing one of the following actions. Press the programmed Wi-Fi On or Off button. Voice Announcement sounds Turning On Wi-Fi or Turning Off Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance. Access this feature via the menu. Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. This feature allows you to setup and connect to a Wi-

Fi network. Wi-Fi supports updates for radio firmware, codeplug, and resources such as language packs and voice announcement. a) b) c) Press to access the menu. Press to select. Press press or to WiFi and press to WiFi Status and or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 249 English Press to turn on Wi-Fi. The display shows beside Enabled. Press from beside Enabled. to turn off Wi-Fi. The disappears Connecting to a Network Access Point Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. When you turn on Wi-Fi, the radio scans and connects to a network access point. You can also connect to a network access point via the menu. 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press 4 5 6 Press and press Press to select. or to a network access point to select. or to Connect and press Enter the password and press When the connection is successful, the radio displays a notice and the network access point is saved into the profile list. Refreshing the Network List Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Perform the following actions to refresh the network list. a) Press b) Press to select. to access the menu. or to WiFi and press e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 250 English c) Press or to select. to Networks and press When you enter the Networks menu, the radio automatically refreshes the network list. If you are already in the Networks menu, perform the following action to refresh the network list. a) to Refresh and press Press or to select. The radio refreshes and displays the latest network list. Adding a Network Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. If a preferred network is not in the available network list, perform the following actions to add a network. 1 Press to access the menu. 2 3 4 Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press Press or to select. to Add Network and press 5 Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and press 6 7

. Press select. or to Open and press to Enter the password and press

. The radio displays network is successfully saved. to indicate that the A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 251 English Viewing Details of Network Access Points Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Perform the following actions to view details of network access points. Access Control (MAC) address, and Internet Protocol (IP) address are displayed. For a non-connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) and Security Mode are displayed. Removing Network Access Points Press to access the menu. or to WiFi and press to Note:

This feature is applicable to XPR 5550e/XPR 5580e only. Enterprise network access points that are added via CPS can only be removed via CPS. or to Networks and press Perform the following actions to remove network access points from the profile list. or to a network access point to select. Press or to select. to View Details and press For a connected network access point, the Service Set Identifier (SSID), Security Mode, Media 1 2 3 Press to access the menu. Press select. Press to select. or to WiFi and press to or to Networks and press 1 2 3 4 5 Press select. Press to select. Press and press e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 252 English 4 5 6 or Press access point and press to the selected network to select. Press select. Press select. or to Remove and press to or to Yes and press to The radio displays selected network access point is successfully removed. to indicate that the Utilities Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts

(except for the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed. Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all tones on or off, or follow the procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 described next to access this feature via the radio menu. to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to All Tones and press to l P u s M o d e to enable/disable all tones and alerts. Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. 253 English Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed. This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/

alerts, allowing it to be higher or lower than the voice volume. 1 2 3 4 5 6 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Vol. Offset and press to or to the required volume value. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A The radio sounds a feedback tone with each corresponding volume value. 7 Do one of the following:

Press volume value. to keep the required displayed Press volume offset settings. to exit without changing the current Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. 254 English 4 5 6 or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Talk Permit and press to to enable/disable the Talk Permit Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Turning the Power Up Alert Tone On or Off You can enable and disable the Power Up Alert Tone if needed. 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 3 4 5 6 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. or select. to Tones/Alerts and press to Power Up and press to to enable/disable the Power Up Alert Press Tone. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Setting the Power Level You can customize your radios power setting to high or low for each Connect Plus zone. High enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode located at a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication with tower sites in Connect Plus mode in closer proximity. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 255 English Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit power level between high and low. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio menu. Changing the Display Mode You can change radios display mode between Day or Night, as needed. This affects the color palette of the display. Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. Press press to Radio Settings and or to select. or to Power and press to to the required setting and or to select. appears beside selected setting. At any time, to return to the Home screen. long press Screen returns to the previous menu. 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 256 English to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to Display and press to select. The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. or to enable. setting. to the required setting and press appears besides selected Adjusting the Display Brightness You can adjust the display brightness of the radio as needed. Note:

Display brightness cannot be adjusted when Auto Brightness is enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Display and press to or to Brightness and press to select. The display shows a progress bar. 6 Decrease display brightness by pressing increase the display brightness by pressing Select from setting of 1 to 8. Press to confirm your entry. or

. A d v a n c e d F e a t Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Display and press to u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 257 English 5 6 or to select. to Intro Screen and press to enable/disable the Introduction Press Screen. The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Language You can set your radio display to be in your required language. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 258 English 4 5 or select. to Languages and press to or to enable. language. to the required language and press appears beside selected Turning the LED Indicator On or Off You can enable and disable the LED Indicator if needed. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or to select. to LED Indicator and press to enable/disable the LED Indicator. 5 Press The display shows The beside Enabled. disappears from beside Enabled. Identifying Cable Type You can select the type of cable your radio uses. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Cable Type and press to 5 The current cable type is indicated by a

. Voice Announcement This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable button press. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Voice Announcement and press or to select. You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following:

A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 259 English Press The display shows to enable Voice Announcement. beside Enabled. Press The to disable Voice Announcement. disappears from beside Enabled. Menu Timer Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it automatically switches to the Home screen. 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. or select. to Display and press to to Menu Timer and press to e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 260 English 6 to the required setting and press or to select. Turning Horns/Lights On or Off This feature needs to be installed through your radios rear accessory connector by your dealer. Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights. Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns and light feature on or off. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Horn/Lights and press to 4 or select. to Dual Knob and press to 4 5 to enable/disable Horns/Lights. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob. Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a Volume Knob only. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t 5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume &

Ch. press or to the required setting and to select. appears beside selected setting. Screen returns to the previous menu. Digital Mic AGC (Mic AGC-D) This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain automatically while transmitting on a digital system. It suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in order to provide a consistent level of audio. l P u s M o d e 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 261 English 3 4 to Radio Settings and press or to select. or select. to Mic AGC-D and press to 5 Do one of the following:

Press shows to enable Mic AGC-D. The display beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Mic AGC-D. The Intelligent Audio Your radio can automatically adjust its audio volume to overcome background noise in the environment, inclusive of all stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio. 1 to access the menu. Radio Con-

trol Menu Steps 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or and press or and press to Radio Settings to select. to Radio Settings to select. or to Intelligent Au dio and press to select. Note:

You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following:

Press Audio. The display shows side Enabled. to enable Intelligent be-

e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 262 English Steps Radio Con-

trol Press Audio. The side Enabled. to disable Intelligent disappears from be-

2 3 4 or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. to Intelligent Audio and press or to select. 5 Do one of the following:

Press display shows to enable Intelligent Audio. The beside Enabled. Press disappears from beside Enabled. to disable Intelligent Audio. The See Authorized Accessories List on page 277 for recommended Bluetooth-enabled audio accessories with in-built Automatic Volume Control for similar performance. Turning the Acoustic Feedback Suppressor Feature On or Off This feature allows you to minimize acoustic feedback in received calls. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Settings and press or to select. l P u s M o d e or to select. to AF Suppressor and press 263 English You can also use or to change the selected option. 5 Do one of the following. Press Suppressor. The display shows Enabled. to enable Acoustic Feedback beside Press Suppressor. The Enabled. to disable Acoustic Feedback disappears from beside Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) is a satellite navigation system that determines the radios precise location. GNSS includes Global Positioning System (GPS), Global Navigation Satellite System

(GLONASS), and BeiDou Navigation Satellite System

(BDS). Press the programmed GPS/GNSS button to toggle the feature on or off. 1 2 3 4 5 system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. Press to access the menu. Press or to select. to Utilities and press Press press Press select. to Radio Settings and or to select. or to GPS and press to to enable/disable GPS/GNSS. beside Enabled. Press The display shows The disappears from beside Enabled. Note:

Selected radio models may offer GPS, GLONASS, and BDS. GNSS constellation is configured via CPS. Check with your dealer or See Checking the GPS/GNSS Information on page 137 for details on retrieving GPS/GNSS information. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 264 English Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Battery Degree of Tilt (Accelerometer) Radio Model Number Index Option Board Over-the-Air (OTA) Codeplug CRC Site Number Site Info Radio Alias and ID Firmware and Codeplug Versions GPS Information at any time to return to the previous to return to the Home Press screen or long press screen. The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer expires. Checking the Radio Model Number Index This index number identifies your radios model-

specific hardware. Your radio system administrator may ask for this number when preparing a new Option Board codeplug for your radio. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Model Index and press to select. The display shows the Model Number Index. Checking the CRC of the Option Board OTA Codeplug File Follow the instructions below if your radio system administrator asks you to view the Option Board OTA Codeplug File CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). This menu option only appears if the Option Board received its last codeplug update OTA. 1 to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 265 English 2 3 4 or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to OB OTA CPcrc and press or to select. The display shows some letters and numbers. Communicate this information to your radio system administrator exactly as shown. Displaying the Site ID (Site Number) Note:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The radio briefly shows the Site ID as it registers with a Connect Plus site. Following registration, the radio does not generally indicate the Site number. To display the registered Site number, do the following:

1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 266 English 2 3 4 or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Site Number and press to select. The display shows the Network ID and the Site Number. Checking the Site Info Note:

If you are not currently registered at a site, the display shows Not Registered. The Site Info feature provides information that can be useful to a service technician. It consists of the following information:

Repeater number of current Control Channel repeater. RSSI: Last signal strength value measured from Control Channel repeater. Neighbor List sent by Control Channel repeater

(five numbers separated by commas). If you are requested to use this feature, please report the displayed information exactly as it appears on the screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Site Info and press to select. The display shows the Site Info. Checking the Radio ID This feature displays the ID of your radio. Follow the procedure described next to access this feature via the radio screen. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to My ID and press to select. The display shows the radio ID. Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug Version Displays the firmware version on your radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to 267 English 4 e d o M s u P l or to Versions and press to

(Radio) Firmware Version

(Radio) Codeplug Version select. The display a list with the following information:

Option Board Firmware Version Option Board Frequency Version Option Board Hardware Version Option Board Codeplug Version t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 268 Checking for Updates Connect Plus provides the ability to update certain files (Option Board Codeplug, Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File) over-the-air. Note:

Check with the dealer or network administrator to determine whether this feature has been enabled for your radio. Any display Connect Plus radio has the ability to show its current Option Board OTA Codeplug CRC, Frequency File version or Option Board firmware file version via a menu option. In addition, display radios that have been enabled for over-the-air file transfer English can display the version of a "pending file". A "pending file" is a Frequency File or Option Board firmware file that the Connect Plus radio knows about via system messaging, but the radio has not yet collected all of the files packets. If a display Connect Plus radio has a pending file, the menu provides options to:

See the version number of the pending file. See what percentage of packets has been collected so far. Request the Connect Plus radio to resume collecting file packets. If the radio is enabled for Connect Plus over-the-air file transfer, there may be times when the radio automatically joins a file transfer without first notifying the radio user. While the radio is collecting file packets, the LED rapidly blinks red and the radio displays the High Volume Data icon on the Home Screen status bar. Note:

The Connect Plus radio cannot collect file packets and receive calls at the same time. If you wish to cancel the file transfer, press and release the PTT button. This causes the radio to request a call on the selected Contact Name, and it will also cancel the file transfer for that radio until the process resumes at a later time. There are several things that can make the file transfer process start again. The first example applies to all over-the-air file types. The other examples apply only to the Network Frequency File and Option Board Firmware File:

The radio system administrator re-initiates the over-the-air file transfer. The Option Board's pre-defined timer expires, which causes the Option Board to automatically resume the process of collecting packets. The timer has not yet expired, but the radio user requests the file transfer to resume via the menu option. After the Connect Plus radio finishes downloading all file packets, it must upgrade to the newly acquired file. For the Network Frequency File, this is an automatic process and does not require a radio reset. For the Option Board Codeplug File, this is an automatic process that will cause a brief interruption to service as the Option Board loads the new codeplug information and re-acquires a network site. How quickly the radio upgrades to a new Option Board firmware file depends on how the radio has A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e been configured by the dealer or system administrator. The radio will either upgrade immediately after collecting all file packets, or it will wait until the next time that the user turns the radio on. Note:

Check with your dealer or system administrator to determine how your radio has been programmed. The process of upgrading to a new Option Board firmware file takes several seconds, and it requires the Connect Plus Option Board to reset the radio. Once the upgrade starts, the radio use will not be able to make or receive calls until the process is completed. Firmware File Firmware Up to Date Note:

If the Option Board firmware file is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent Option Board firmware file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. 269 English 1 2 3 4 5 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to 3 4 5 6 or to Firmware and press to select. The display shows Firmware is Up to Date. Pending Firmware Version 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to or select. or select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to to Firmware and press to or to Version and press to select. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows the pending firmware version number. If there is a pending Option Board firmware file, the display shows Firmware is Up to Date. Pending Firmware % Received 1 to access the menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n t i s e r u a e F d e c n a v d A 270 English 2 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to to Firmware and press to or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of firmware file packets collected so far. Note:

When at 100%, the radio needs to be power cycled Off and then On to initiate the firmware upgrade. Pending Firmware Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Option Board Firmware File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Option Board Firmware File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. to access the menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t or select. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to l P u s M o d e to Updates and press to to Firmware and press to 271 English 1 2 3 4 5 6 or to Download and press to select. The display shows the following:

Download Available No Download Availa-

ble Start Download Download not availa ble to start the 7 Do one of the following:

Select Yes and press download. Select No and press previous menu. Frequency File Frequency File Up to Date Note:

If the Frequency File is not Up to Date (and if the radio has partially collected a more recent frequency file version) the radio displays a list with additional options; Version, %Received, and Download. 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to or to Frequency and press to select. The display shows Freq. File is Up to Date. 1 2 3 to access the menu. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to return to the Frequency File Pending Version e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 272 English 4 5 6 1 2 3 or select. or select. to Updates and press to to Frequency and press to 4 5 or to Version and press to select. If there is a pending Frequency File, the display shows the pending Frequency File version number. Frequency File Pending % Received to access the menu. or select. to Updates and press to or to %Received and press to select. The screen displays the percentage of frequency file packets collected so far. Frequency File Pending Download If the Connect Plus radio has previously left an OTA Network Frequency File Transfer with a partial file, the unit automatically rejoins the file transfer (if still ongoing) when an internal timer expires. If you want the unit to rejoin an ongoing Network Frequency File transfer prior to expiration of this internal timer, use the Download option as described below. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to 1 2 to access the menu. or select. to Utilities and press to 273 English 3 4 5 6 or select. or select. or select. or select. to Radio Info and press to to Updates and press to to Frequency and press to to Download and press to Download Currently Unavailable Download Currently Available Download not avail able Start Download 7 Do one of the following:

Select Yes and press to start the download. Select No and press to return to the previous menu. e d o M s u P l t c e n n o C n i s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 274 English Checking the GPS/GNSS Information Displays the GPS/GNSS information on your radio, such as values of:

Latitude Longitude Altitude Direction Velocity Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) Satellites Version 1 2 3 4 to access the menu. or select. or select. or select. to Utilities and press to to Radio Info and press to to GPS Info and press to 5 to the required item and press or to select. The display shows the requested GPS/GNSS information. See Turning GPS/GNSS On or Off on page 134 for details on GPS/GNSS. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s i n C o n n e c t l P u s M o d e 275 English Accessories s e i r o s s e c c A 276 English Authorized Accessories List Antennas VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4006_) VHF, 146 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4007_) VHF, 150.8 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4008_) VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4009_) VHF, 132 174 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAD4022_) UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4002_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4003_) UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4004_) UHF, 406 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4010_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4011_) UHF, 470 494 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4012_) UHF, 494 512 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE4013_) Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4000_) Window Mount GPS Active Antenna

(PMAN4001_) Magnetic Mount GPS Active Antenna

(PMAN4002_) Combination GPS+RF, Base Only, Through-hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAN4004_) UHF, 403 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6022_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4029_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4030_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4032_) Combination GPS+RF, 806 941 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4033_) UHF, 445 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Moun, Mini-U (with base) (RAE4004_RB) UHF, 445 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (without base) (RAE4004_) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t 277 English Combination GPS/VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4214_) Combination GPS/VHF, 146 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4215_) Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4216_) Combination GPS/VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4217_) Combination GPS/VHF, 146 172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4218_) Combination GPS/UHF, 403 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6019_) Combination GPS/UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6020_) Combination GPS/UHF, 470 494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6024_) Combination GPS/UHF, 494 512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6026_) Combination GPS/UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4030_) Combination GPS/UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4031_) Combination GPS/UHF, 406 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4032_) t s L i s e i r o s s e c c A d e z i r o h t u A 278 English Combination GPS/UHF, 450 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4033_) Combination GPS/UHF, 450 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4034_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4025_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, 3.0dB Gain, Through-

Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4026_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, Stubby Antenna, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4013_) 800/900, 806 941 MHz, 5.0dB Gain, Through-

Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAF4027_) For use with base PMAN4004_ only:

UHF, 403 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4039_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave (PMAE4041_) UHF, 406 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4040_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain (PMAE4042_) UHF, 450 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain (PMAE4043_) VHF, 162 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4223_) VHF, 150.8 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4224_) VHF, 146 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4225_) VHF, 136 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave (RAD4226_) VHF, 146 172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain (RAD4227_) UHF, 470 527 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6030_) UHF, 403 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6029_) UHF, 470 494 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6028_) UHF, 494 512 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount (HAE6027_) Audio Telephone Style Handset (HMN4098_) Desktop Microphone (RMN5050_) Compact Microphone (RMN5052_) IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone

(RMN5127_) Heavy Duty Microphone with Enhanced Audio

(RMN5053_) Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio

(RMN5054_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 12 Cable

(NNTN8125_) Operations Critical Wireless Push-to-Talk POD

(NNTN8127_) Non-Secure Wireless Headset & Push-to-Talk Device with Push-to-Talk Audio, 12-Inch Cable

(NNTN8189_) Bluetooth Accessory Kit, SP, 9.5 Cable

(NNTN8190_) Operations Critical Wireless Earpiece, 9.5 Cable

(NNTN8126_) Wireless Covert Kit, includes two sets of 2-Wire Earbuds (1 Black and 1 White), 1-Wire Earbud

(Black), and a 3.5 mm Adapter to plug into any off-

the-shelf headphones (NNTN8296_) [7]

Wireless Neckloop Y-adapter and retention hook for Completely Discreet Kit (NNTN8385_) [7]

HK200 Bluetooth Headset (89409N) Compact Microphone Replacement Cable

(3075336B07) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t Heavy Duty/Keypad Microphone Replacement Cable (3075336B10) Completely Discreet Earpiece Kit (RLN4922_) [7]

XBT Behind-the-Neck, Non-Secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset (RLN6490_) XBT Overhead, Non-Secure Wireless Heavy Duty Headset (RLN6491_) MOTOTRBO Bluetooth Accessory Kit with NA Power Supply (RLN6500_) 279 English Swivel Earpiece with In-Line Microphone for Bluetooth Accessory Kit Pod, Pack of 3

(RLN6550_) [7]

Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic

(PMLN7181_) [7]

Flexible Fit Swivel Earpiece with Boom Mic, Multipack (PMLN7203_) [7]

Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet

(PMKN4034_) Mobile Front (MMP) Programming Cable

(HKN6184_) MAP Programming Cable (PMKN4010_) MAP Programming and Test Cable (PMKN4016_) Remote Mount (3-metre) Cable (PMKN4143_) Remote Mount (5-metre) Cable (PMKN4144_) Cables Desktop Accessories Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, 15 amp (1 25 Watt) (HKN4137_) Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-metre) Cable, 20 amp (1 45 Watt) (HKN4191_) Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-metre) Cable, 20 amp (1 45 Watt) (HKN4192_) Mobile and Repeater Rear Accessory Connector Universal Cable (PMKN4018_) Ignition Sense Cable (RKN4136_) Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet

(PMKN4033_) Radio Power Cable for GPN6145 (GKN6266_) Desktop Tray without Speaker (GLN7318_) Desktop Tray with Speaker (RSN4005_) Switchmode Power Supply (1 25 Watt Models)

(CE marked) (GPN6145_) Power Supply and Cable (HPN4007_) Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector

(PMLN5072_) US Line Cord (3060665A04) Euro Line Cord (3060665A05) Power Cable, UK Plug (Straight) (3002695B05) 7 Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed here. Contact your dealer for details. t s L i s e i r o s s e c c A d e z i r o h t u A 280 English Mounting Kits In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit (RLN6465_) Low Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6466_) High Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6467_) Key Lock Trunnion Kit (RLN6468_) Low Profile Trunnion Bag (RLN6469_) Remote Mount Transceiver Interface

(PMLN6402_) Remote Mount Control Head Interface

(PMLN6403_) Speakers 13-Watt External Speaker (RSN4002_) 7.5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4003_) 5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4004_) Miscellaneous Accessories PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8-foot (2.4-metre) Cable (HKN9557_) Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones)

(HLN9073_) Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones) (HLN9414_) Push Button PTT (RLN5926_) Emergency Footswitch (RLN5929_) IMPRES Mobile MMP Non-PC Adapter

(PMKN4072_) IMPRES Mobile MAP Non-PC Adapter

(PMKN4070_) Surge Protector, Tower Mount Kit (DQT1) Surge Protector, Coax Protector Bulkhead

(DSISB50LNC2MA) Generic Option Board (PMLN5718_S) Operations Critical Wireless 1-Wire Surveillance Kit with translucent tube (PMLN7052_) A u t h o r i z e d A c c e s s o r i e s i L s t 281 English Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

bearing (state whether you are using true or latitude and longitude magnetic north) e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 282 English distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Operating Frequency Requirements A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency. on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note:

Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table 1: VHF Marine Channel List Channel Num-

ber Frequency (MHz) Transmit Receive 1 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

156.050 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 160.650 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 283 English 18 19 20

*

22

*

24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

78 79 80

*

*

*

156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 e g n a R y c n e u q e r F F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M 284 English 84 85 86 87 88 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025 Note:

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only.

*** Guard band. Note:

A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. Declaration of Compliance for the Use of Distress and Safety Frequencies The radio equipment does not employ a modulation other than the internationally adopted modulation for maritime use when it operates on the distress and safety frequencies specified in RSS-182 Section 7.3. M a r i t i Technical Parameters for Interfacing External Data Sources RS232 18V USB 3.6V SB9600 5V 28 kb/s 12 Mb/s 9.6 kb/s Input Volt-

age (Volts Peak-to-

peak) Max Data Rate Impedance 5000 ohm 90 ohm 120 ohm m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e 285 English Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

Digital Mobile Radios Product Accessories 24 Months 12 Months MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 286 English applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y 287 English V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

1 Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 2 Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 3 Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. 4 Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. 5 A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. 6 Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. 7 Rechargeable batteries if:

y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 288 English any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. 8 Freight costs to the repair depot. 9 A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. 10 Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. 11 Normal and customary wear and tear. VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

1 that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim, 2 that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise, and 3 should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished i L m i t e d W a r r a n t y hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. 289 English VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. y t n a r r a W d e t i m L i 290 English Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 20112015 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. November 2015 www.motorolasolutions.com/mototrbo

*68009504001*

68009504001-GC

 

 

6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed in Vehicles, Vessels or as Fixed Site Control Stations ATTENTION!

BEFORE USING THIS RADIO, READ THIS BOOKLET WHICH CONTAINS IMPORTANT OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SAFE USAGE AND RF ENERGY AWARENESS AND CONTROL INFORMATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH RF ENERGY EXPOSURE LIMITS IN APPLICABLE NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS. The information provided in this document supersedes the general safety information contained in user guides published prior to January 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, U.S.A.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM RF Energy Exposure Awareness and Control Information, and Operational Instructions for FCC Occupational Use Requirements NOTICE: This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. This two-way radio uses electromagnetic energy in the radio frequency (RF) spectrum to provide communications between two or more users over a distance. It uses radio frequency (RF) energy or radio waves to send and receive calls. RF energy is one form of electromagnetic energy. Other forms include, but are not limited to, sunlight and x-rays. RF energy, however, should not be confused with these other forms of electromagnetic energy, which when used improperly, can cause biological damage. Very high levels of x-rays, for example, can damage tissues and genetic material. Experts in science, engineering, medicine, health, and industry work with organizations to develop standards for safe exposure to RF energy. These standards provide recommended levels of RF exposure for both workers and the general public. These recommended RF exposure levels include substantial margins of protection. All Motorola two-way radios are designed, manufactured, and tested to ensure they meet government-established RF exposure levels. In addition, manufacturers also recommend specific operating instructions to users of two-way radios. These instructions are important because they inform users about RF energy exposure and provide simple procedures on how to control it. English 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Please refer to the following Web sites for more information on what RF energy exposure is and how to control your exposure to assure compliance with established RF exposure limits. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Federal Communication Commission Regulations The FCC rules require manufacturers to comply with the FCC RF energy exposure limits for mobile two-way radios before they can be marketed in the U.S. When two-way radios are used as a consequence of employment, the FCC requires users to be fully aware of and able to control their exposure to meet occupational requirements. Exposure awareness can be facilitated by the use of a label directing users to specific user awareness information. Your Motorola two-way radio has a RF exposure product label. Also, your Motorola user manual, or separate safety booklet, includes information and operating instructions required to control your RF exposure and to satisfy compliance requirements. Compliance with RF Exposure Standard Your Motorola two-way radio is designed and tested to comply with a number of national and international standards and guidelines (listed below) regarding human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy. This radio complies with the IEEE and ICNIRP exposure limits for occupational/

controlled RF exposure environment at duty factors of up to 50% talk-50%

listen and is authorized by the FCC for occupational use only. In terms of measuring RF energy for compliance with the FCC exposure guidelines, your radio antenna radiates measurable RF energy only while it is transmitting

(during talking), not when it is receiving (listening) or in standby mode. 3 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Your Motorola two-way radio complies with the following RF energy exposure standards and guidelines:

United States Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR et seq. FCC, OET Bulletin 65 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) C95.1 International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) Ministry of Health (Canada) Safety Code 6 Industry Canada RSS-102 Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications Standard et seq. ANATEL ANNEX to Resolution No. 303 et seq. RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions To control exposure to yourself and others and to ensure compliance with the RF exposure limits, always adhere to the following procedures. Guidelines:

User awareness instructions should accompany device when transferred to other users. DO NOT use this device if the operational requirements described herein are not met. English 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Instructions:

Transmit no more than the rated duty factor of 50% of the time. To transmit

(talk), push the Push-To-Talk (PTT) button or, for radios equipped with VOX, speak into the microphone. The red LED will illuminate when the radio is transmitting. To receive calls, release the PTT button, or, for radios equipped with VOX, stop talking. The red LED will extinguish when the radio stops transmitting. Transmitting 50% of the time, or less, is important because this radio generates measurable RF energy exposure only when transmitting (in terms of measuring for standards compliance). Transmit only when people outside the vehicle are at least the recommended minimum lateral distance away, as shown in Table 1, from the body of a vehicle with a properly installed antenna. This separation distance will ensure that there is sufficient distance from a properly installed

(according to installation instructions) externally-mounted antenna to satisfy the RF exposure requirements in the standards listed above. NOTE: Table 1 below lists the recommended lateral distance for people in an uncontrolled environment from the body of a vehicle with an approved, properly installed transmitting antenna (i.e., monopoles over a ground plane, or dipoles) at several different ranges of rated radio power for mobile radios installed in a vehicle. Table 1. Rated Power of Vehicle-Installed Mobile Two-Way Radio and Recommended Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body Mobile Radio Rated Power (see Note) Less than 7 watts 7 to 14 watts 15 to 39 watts 40 to 110 watts Minimum Lateral Distance from Vehicle Body 8 inches (20 centimeters) 1 foot (30 centimeters) 2 feet (60 centimeters) 3 feet (90 centimeters) 5 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM When a mobile radio is used in conjunction with another co-located transmitter such as a Vehicular Repeater, it is the vehicle operators responsibility to take appropriate steps to keep bystanders at the required separation distance from the vehicle to ensure compliance with the FCC's RF energy exposure limits for the general population. See the co-located transmitters user manual for more details. NOTE: If you are not sure of the rated power of your radio, contact your Motorola representative or dealer and supply the radio model number found on the radio model label. If you can not determine the rated power out, then assure 3-feet separation from the body of the vehicle. Users of multi-band radios subject to different separation distances in different operating bands according to Table 1 should select the larger applicable distance as the minimum lateral distance for bystanders outside the vehicle. The maximum power shown on the FCC Grant may be higher than the rated power allowing for production variation. Mobile Antenna Installation Guidelines These mobile antenna installation guidelines are limited to metal body motor vehicles or vehicles with appropriate ground planes. Antennas should be installed in the center area of the roof or the trunk lid taking into account exposure conditions of backseat passengers and according to the specific instructions and restrictions in the Radio Installation Manual along with the requirements of the antenna supplier. Trunk lid installations are limited to vehicles with clearly defined flat trunk lids, and in some cases, to specific radio models and antennas. See the Radio Installation Manual for specific information on how and where to install specific types of approved antennas to facilitate recommended operating distances to all potentially exposed persons. Use only the Motorola-approved, supplied antenna or a Motorola-

approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or English 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM attachments could damage the radio and may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. Approved Accessories This radio has been tested and meets RF Safety Standards when used with the Motorola accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may result in non-compliance with RF Safety Standards. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and accessories, refer to the user manual for your radio model. Additional Information For additional information on exposure requirements or other training information, visit: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/

ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed as Fixed Site Control Stations If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. 7 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances provided above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions for Mobile Two-Way Radios Installed on Maritime Vessels If mobile radio equipment is installed on a vessel and operated as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed on page 4:

An antenna intended for Maritime operation should be chosen and installed according to the manufacturers recommendations. The antennas should be mounted solidly to the vessel structure at the highest location possible. As with all radio antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the operator to maintain adequate distances from the antenna and all personnel on board the vessel or adjacent to the vessel. For additional installation information, see the guidelines for minimum separation distances proved above in the RF Exposure Compliance and Control Guidelines and Operating Instructions section of this document. Electromagnetic Interference/Compatibility NOTE: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed, or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. It may be necessary to conduct compatibility testing to determine if any electronic equipment used in or around vehicles or near fixed site antenna is sensitive to external RF energy or if any procedures need to be followed to eliminate or mitigate the potential for interaction between the radio transmitter and the equipment or device. English 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Vehicles To avoid possible interaction between the radio transmitter and any vehicle electronic control modules, such as ABS, engine, or transmission controls, the radio should be installed only by an experienced installer and the following precautions should be used when installing the radio:

1. Refer to the manufacturers instructions or other technical bulletins for recommendations on radio installation. 2. Before installing the radio, determine the location of the electronic control modules and their harnesses in the vehicle. 3. Route all radio wiring, including the antenna transmission line, as far away as possible from the electronic control units and associated wiring. Driver Safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of radios in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using your radio while driving, please:

Give full attention to driving and to the road. Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. 9 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Acoustic Safety Exposure to loud noises from any source for extended periods of time may temporarily or permanently affect your hearing. The louder the radio's volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing damage from loud noise is sometimes undetectable at first and can have a cumulative effect. To protect your hearing:

Use the lowest volume necessary to do your job. Turn up the volume only if you are in noisy surroundings. Turn down the volume before adding headset or earpiece. Limit the amount of time you use headsets or earpieces at high volume. When using the radio without a headset or earpiece, do not place the radio's speaker directly against your ear. English 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM Operational Warnings W A R N I N G For Vehicles with an Air Bag DO NOT mount or place a mobile radio in the area over an air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, posted. Blasting Caps and Blasting Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. For radios installed in vehicles fueled by liquefied petroleum gas, refer to the (U.S.) National Fire Protection Association standard, NFPA 58, for storage, handling, and/or container information. For a copy of the LP-gas standard, NFPA 58, contact the National Fire Protection Association, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. 11 English 6881095C99_SafetyM_Eng.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:43 PM English 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Folleto de normas de seguridad y de exposicin a la energa de RF al usar radios bidireccionales mviles instalados en vehculos, embarcaciones o estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos ATENCIN ANTES DE USAR EL RADIO LEA ESTE FOLLETO, EL CUAL CONTIENE INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACIN IMPORTANTES PARA SU USO SEGURO, AS COMO INFORMACIN SOBRE LA ENERGA DE RF Y SU CONTROL, PARA GARANTIZAR SU CONFORMIDAD CON LOS LMITES DE EXPOSICIN A LA ENERGA DE RADIOFRECUENCIA ESTABLECIDOS EN LAS NORMAS NACIONALES E INTERNACIONALES APLICABLES. La informacin incluida en este documento reemplaza la informacin de seguridad general contenida en los manuales de usuario publicados antes de enero de 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS y el logotipo estilizado M son marcas de fabrica o marcas registradas de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC y son usadas bajo licencia. Todas otras marcas registradas son la propiedad de sus dueos respectivos. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos los derechos estn reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EE.UU.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Informacin sobre exposicin a la energa de RF y su control, e instrucciones operacionales para satisfacer los requisitos de la FCC sobre el uso como herramienta ocupacional AVISO: Este radio est diseado para uso en ambientes ocupacionales controlados, donde los usuarios estn plenamente conscientes de la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia a la que estn sujetos, y pueden ejercer control sobre dicha exposicin para mantenerse dentro de los lmites establecidos por la FCC. Esta unidad de radio NO est aprobada para la venta al pblico en general en el mercado de consumo masivo, ni para uso en entornos diferentes al aqu descrito. Este radio bidireccional usa energa electromagntica en el espectro de radiofrecuencia (RF) para permitir las comunicaciones a distancia entre dos o ms usuarios. El mismo emplea la energa de radiofrecuencia u ondas de radio para enviar y recibir llamadas. La energa de RF es una forma de energa electromagntica. Este tipo de energa se presenta en otras formas, entre las que se encuentran la luz solar y los rayos X. La energa de RF, sin embargo, no debe confundirse con estas otras formas de energa electromagntica que, cuando son usadas indebidamente, pueden ocasionar daos biolgicos. Niveles muy elevados de rayos X, por ejemplo, pueden producir daos en tejidos y en material gentico. Expertos en las ciencias, la ingeniera, la medicina, la salud y la industria trabajan conjuntamente con diferentes organizaciones con el fin de desarrollar normas que definan lmites prudentes de exposicin a la energa de RF. Estas normas proporcionan los niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF, tanto para los trabajadores como para el pblico en general. Estos niveles recomendados de exposicin a la RF incluyen mrgenes de seguridad suficientemente amplios. Todos los radios bidireccionales Motorola son diseados, fabricados y probados de manera que aseguren el cumplimiento de los niveles de exposicin a la RF establecidos por los organismos pblicos reguladores. Asimismo, los fabricantes recomiendan a los usuarios de radios bidireccionales seguir instrucciones de operacin especficas. Estas instrucciones son importantes, ya que informan a los usuarios acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF y proporcionan procedimientos sencillos para su control. Espaol Latinoamericano 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Visite los siguientes sitios Web para obtener ms informacin acerca de qu es la exposicin a la energa de RF y cmo controlar dicha exposicin para garantizar la observancia de los lmites de exposicin establecidos. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulaciones de la Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. Las normas de la FCC estipulan que los fabricantes de radios mviles bidireccionales no podrn comercializar sus productos en los EE.UU., a menos que los mismos cumplan con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC. Cuando la naturaleza del trabajo requiere el uso de radios bidireccionales, la FCC exige que los usuarios estn totalmente conscientes de los efectos de la exposicin, y que sean capaces de controlar el nivel de exposicin al que se someten, a fin de satisfacer los requisitos laborales. La informacin sobre exposicin puede facilitarse mediante el uso de una etiqueta que remita a los usuarios a la fuente de informacin apropiada. Su radio bidireccional Motorola tiene una etiqueta con informacin acerca de la exposicin a la energa de RF. Adems, en el manual de usuario del producto Motorola, o en un folleto de seguridad separado, se incluye la informacin e instrucciones de operacin necesarias para controlar la exposicin a la energa de RF y para garantizar el cumplimiento de las normas. Conformidad con la normativa sobre exposicin a la RF Este radio bidireccional Motorola ha sido diseado y verificado con el fin de garantizar su compatibilidad con las siguientes normas y recomendaciones nacionales e internacionales relacionadas con la exposicin de seres humanos a la energa electromagntica de radiofrecuencia. Este radio cumple con los lmites de exposicin establecidos por el IEEE y por la ICNIRP para entornos ocupacionales o con control de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia, a ciclos de trabajo de hasta 50% (50% transmisin y 50% recepcin) y ha sido aprobado por la FCC para uso como herramienta ocupacional solamente. En lo que respecta a la medicin de energa de RF para la determinacin de conformidad con las directrices de exposicin de la FCC, la antena del radio irradia energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (cuando el usuario est hablando), no cuando est recibiendo (cuando el usuario est oyendo) o cuando se encuentra en espera. 3 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Este radio bidireccional Motorola satisface las siguientes normas y recomendaciones relacionadas con la exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia:

Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. (FCC), Cdigo de Reglamentos Federales; 47 CFR y siguientes Comisin Federal de Comunicaciones de EE.UU. (FCC), Boletn OET 65 Instituto de Ingenieros Elctricos y Electrnicos (IEEE), C95.1 Comisin Internacional para la Proteccin contra la Radiacin No Ionizante

(ICNIRP) Ministerio de Sanidad (Canad), Cdigo de seguridad 6 Industria Canad, RSS-102 Direccin Australiana de Comunicaciones, Normativa de Radiocomunicaciones y siguientes ANATEL, Anexo a la Resolucin n 303 y siguientes. Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF e instrucciones de operacin Para controlar la exposicin a la que tanto Ud. como otras personas se someten, y para asegurar el cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a la RF, observe siempre los siguientes procedimientos. Pautas:

El aparato debe ser acompaado de la informacin sobre la energa de RF cuando el mismo sea transferido a otros usuarios. No use este dispositivo sin antes satisfacer los requisitos operacionales aqu descritos. Espaol Latinoamericano 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Instrucciones:

No transmita ms del 50% del tiempo, a fin de no sobrepasar el mximo ciclo de trabajo especificado del 50%. Para transmitir (hablar) presione el botn de transmisin (PTT); si el radio est equipado con VOX, hable hacia el micrfono. El LED rojo se enciende cuando el radio est transmitiendo. Para recibir llamadas, suelte el botn PTT. Si el radio est equipado con VOX, deje de hablar. El LED rojo se apaga cuando el radio termina de transmitir. Es importante no transmitir ms del 50% del tiempo, ya que este radio emite energa de RF medible slo cuando est transmitiendo (en trminos de conformidad con las normas de medicin). Transmita nicamente cuando las personas que se encuentran fuera del vehculo estn apartadas por lo menos la distancia lateral mnima recomendada (indicada en la Tabla 1) de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena debidamente instalada. Esta separacin asegura que haya suficiente distancia entre una antena exterior debidamente instalada (segn las instrucciones de instalacin) para satisfacer los requisitos de exposicin a la energa de RF estipulados en las normas antes mencionadas. NOTA: La Tabla 1 presentada a continuacin indica la distancia lateral recomendada, en un entorno no controlado, a la que los transentes deben mantenerse de la carrocera de un vehculo equipado con una antena transmisora aprobada y debidamente instalada (es decir, monopolos sobre un plano de tierra, o bipolos) para diferentes niveles de potencia nominal de radios mviles instalados en un vehculo. Tabla 1. Potencia nominal del radio bidireccional mvil instalado en un vehculo y distancia lateral mnima recomendada de la carrocera del vehculo Potencia nominal del radio mvil

(ver nota) Menos de 7 vatios 7 a 14 vatios 15 a 39 vatios 40 a 110 vatios Distancia lateral mnima de la carrocera del vehculo 20 centmetros (8 pulg.) 30 centmetros (1 pie) 60 centmetros (2 pies) 90 centmetros (3 pies) 5 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Cuando se usa un radio mvil conjuntamente con otro transmisor ubicado en el mismo sitio como, por ejemplo, un repetidor vehicular, el operador del vehculo es responsable de tomar las medidas necesarias para mantener a los transentes alejados del vehculo la distancia mnima requerida, a fin de garantizar la conformidad con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF establecidos por la FCC para la poblacin en general. Para obtener ms detalles, consulte el manual de usuario de los transmisores ubicados en el mismo sitio. NOTA: Si no est seguro de cul es la potencia nominal de su radio, comunquese con el representante o concesionario Motorola e indquele el nmero de modelo del radio que aparece en la etiqueta del radio. Si no puede determinar la potencia nominal de salida, asegrese de mantener una separacin de un metro (3 pies) de la carrocera del vehculo. Los usuarios de radios multibanda sujetos a diferentes distancias de separacin en diferentes bandas de operacin conforme a la Tabla 1 deben seleccionar la distancia ms grande aplicable como la distancia lateral mnima para los transentes cercanos al vehculo. La potencia mxima mostrada en la autorizacin de la FCC puede ser mayor que la potencia nominal, tomando en consideracin las variaciones que ocurren a nivel de produccin. Pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles Las siguientes pautas para la instalacin de antenas de radios mviles son aplicables nicamente a vehculos automotores con carrocera metlica o a vehculos con planos de tierra apropiados. Las antenas deben ser instaladas en el rea central del techo o de la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje, tomando en consideracin las condiciones de exposicin de los pasajeros que viajen en el asiento trasero, as como las instrucciones y restricciones especficas mencionadas en el manual de instalacin del radio y los requisitos establecidos por el proveedor de la antena. La instalacin en la tapa del compartimiento de equipaje queda limitada a aquellos vehculos cuya tapa del compartimiento de equipaje sea una superficie plana claramente definida y, en algunos casos, a modelos especficos de radios y antenas. Consulte en el manual de instalacin del radio la informacin especfica sobre la ubicacin y la forma de instalar los diferentes tipos de antenas aprobados para satisfacer las distancias de operacin recomendadas entre las antenas y toda persona que pueda quedar expuesta. Espaol Latinoamericano 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Use nicamente la antena Motorola suministrada o una antena de reemplazo aprobada por Motorola. El uso de antenas, modificaciones o accesorios no aprobados podra daar el radio y constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF. Accesorios aprobados Este radio ha sido probado y se ha determinado que satisface las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF siempre que se use con los accesorios Motorola suministrados o designados para este producto. El uso de otros accesorios puede constituir una violacin de las normas de seguridad relacionadas con la energa de RF. Para obtener una lista de antenas y accesorios Motorola aprobados, consulte el manual de usuario para el modelo de radio. Informacin adicional Para obtener informacin adicional sobre los requisitos de exposicin o informacin sobre capacitacin, visite: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/

ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Pautas de control y conformidad, e instrucciones de operacin de radios bidireccionales mviles instalados como estaciones de control en emplazamientos fijos Si un equipo de radio mvil se instala en un lugar fijo y se hace funcionar como estacin de control o como unidad fija, la instalacin de la antena deber satisfacer los siguientes requisitos, a fin de garantizar un rendimiento ptimo y de cumplir con los lmites de exposicin a la energa de radiofrecuencia establecidos en las normas y pautas enumeradas en la pgina 4:

La antena se debe montar fuera del edificio, en el techo o en una torre, siempre que sea posible. Como en todas las instalaciones de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es responsabilidad del portador de la licencia mantener el emplazamiento de conformidad con los reglamentos aplicables, y es posible que existan requisitos adicionales como mediciones de propagacin, colocacin de letreros y restricciones de acceso al emplazamiento. 7 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Para obtener informacin adicional sobre la instalacin, consulte las directrices relativas a las distancias de separacin antes mencionadas en la seccin de este documento titulada Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF, e instrucciones de operacin. Pautas de Cumplimiento y Control e Instrucciones de Uso para usar radios bidireccionales mviles instalados en embarcaciones martimas Si el equipo de radio mvil est instalado en una embarcacin y funciona como una unidad fija, la instalacin de la antena debe cumplir con los siguientes requisitos con el fin de garantizar un rendimiento ptimo y cumplimiento de los lmites de exposicin a la energa de RF en las normas y pautas que figuran en la pgina 4:

Una antena destinada a la operacin Martima se debe elegir e instalar de acuerdo con las recomendaciones de los fabricantes. Las antenas se deben montar firmemente a la estructura de la embarcacin en el lugar ms alto posible. De la misma forma que con todas las instalaciones de antena de radio, es responsabilidad del operador mantener una distancia adecuada hasta la antena y de todo el personal a bordo del barco o que se encuentre en sus proximidades. Si desea obtener informacin adicional sobre la instalacin, consulte las directrices sobre distancias de separacin mnimas indicadas anteriormente en la seccin Pautas de conformidad y control de la exposicin de RF einstrucciones de operacin de este documento. Interferencia y compatibilidad electromagntica NOTA: Casi todos los dispositivos electrnicos son susceptibles a la interferencia electromagntica si no cuentan con el debido blindaje, o si no estn diseados o configurados de manera que sean compatibles con este tipo de seales electromagnticas. Puede que sea necesario realizar pruebas de compatibilidad para determinar si alguno de los equipos electrnicos usados en los vehculos, cerca de ellos o cerca de antenas en emplazamientos fijos, es sensible a la energa de radiofrecuencia externa, o si hay que ejecutar algn procedimiento para eliminar o reducir la posibilidad de interaccin entre el radio transmisor y el equipo o dispositivo. Espaol Latinoamericano 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Edificaciones Para evitar problemas de interferencia y/o compatibilidad electromagntica, apague el radio en todos los lugares donde haya letreros que as lo establezcan. Por ejemplo, en hospitales e instalaciones de asistencia mdica podran estar usando aparatos sensibles a la energa de RF externa. Vehculos Para evitar una posible interaccin entre el radio transmisor y cualquiera de los mdulos de control electrnico del vehculo (por ejemplo, el control del sistema antibloqueo de frenos (ABS), el control del motor o el control de la transmisin), se debe contratar a un instalador experimentado para realizar la instalacin del radio, as como tomar las siguientes precauciones:

1. Consulte las instrucciones proporcionadas por el fabricante y dems boletines tcnicos que contengan recomendaciones para la instalacin del radio. 2. Antes de instalar el radio, determine la ubicacin de los mdulos de control electrnico y del tendido de los cables del vehculo. 3. Haga pasar todo el cableado del radio, incluida la lnea de transmisin de la antena, lo ms lejos posible de las unidades de control electrnico y del tendido de cables correspondiente. Seguridad al conducir Consulte las leyes y reglamentos para el uso de radios en las zonas donde conduce. Obedzcalas siempre. Cuando utilice el radio al conducir un vehculo:

Preste atencin al camino y a las condiciones de conduccin. Salga del camino y estacione el vehculo antes de realizar o contestar una llamada, si la situacin lo amerita. Seguridad acstica La exposicin a ruidos intensos provenientes de cualquier fuente por perodos de tiempo prolongados podran afectar su capacidad auditiva de forma temporal o permanente. Mientras ms alto sea el volumen del radio, ms pronto podra resultar afectada su capacidad auditiva. El dao auditivo producido por ruidos 9 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM intensos a veces puede que sea imperceptible al principio, pero puede tener un efecto acumulativo. Para proteger su capacidad auditiva:

Use el menor volumen que le permita realizar sus tareas. Aumente el volumen nicamente cuando est en un entorno ruidoso. Disminuya el volumen antes de conectar un audfono o un auricular. Lmite el tiempo de uso de audfonos o auriculares a alto volumen. Cuando use el radio sin un audfono o auricular, no se coloque el parlante del radio pegado a la oreja. Espaol Latinoamericano 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Advertencias operacionales ADVERTENCIA ADVERTENCIA Vehculos con bolsas de aire No instale ni coloque un radio mvil sobre una bolsa de aire ni en el rea de despliegue de la misma. Las bolsas de aire se inflan con mucha fuerza. Si se coloca un radio en el rea de despliegue de la bolsa de aire, cuando sta se infle el radio podra salir proyectado con gran velocidad y ocasionar lesiones graves a los pasajeros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Apague el radio antes de entrar en reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas. Las chispas en atmsferas potencialmente explosivas pueden desencadenar explosiones o incendios, y ocasionar lesiones e incluso la muerte. Entre los entornos potencialmente explosivos se encuentran las reas con combustible, por ejemplo, debajo de la cubierta de barcos, instalaciones de transferencia y almacenamiento de combustible o de productos qumicos, y reas donde el aire contiene productos qumicos o partculas tales como polvo de cereales, polvo comn o polvo metlico. En las reas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas generalmente hay seales de precaucin, aunque no siempre es as. reas de voladuras y explosivos Para evitar una posible interferencia con las operaciones de detonacin, apague el radio cuando est cerca de detonadores elctricos, en un rea de detonaciones o donde haya letreros que indiquen apagar los radios bidireccionales. Obedezca todas las seales e instrucciones. Para el caso de radios instalados en vehculos propulsados por gas licuado de petrleo, consulte la norma NFPA 58 de la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association) para obtener informacin sobre almacenamiento, manejo y/

o contenedores. Para obtener una copia de la norma NFPA 58 comunquese con la Asociacin nacional estadounidense de proteccin contra incendios (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EE. 11 Espaol Latinoamericano 6881095C99_SafetyM_LAS.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 20, 2012 2:39 PM Espaol Latinoamericano 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Guia de Exposio Energia RF e de Segurana do Produto para Rdios Portteis de Duas Vias Instalados em Veculos, Embarcaes ou como Estaes de Controle de Local Fixo ATENO ANTES DE UTILIZAR O RDIO PROCURE LER ESTE FOLHETO, QUE CONTM IMPORTANTES INSTRUES DE OPERAO PARA O USO SEGURO, BEM COMO INFORMAES SOBRE A ENERGIA DE RF E SEU CONTROLE, COM A FINALIDADE DE GARANTIR A CONFORMIDADE COM OS LIMITES DE EXPOSIO ENERGIA DE RADIOFREQNCIA ESTABELECIDOS NAS NORMAS NACIONAIS E INTERNACIONAIS APLICVEIS. As informaes contidas neste documento substituem as informaes a respeito de segurana geral contidas nos manuais do usurio publicados antes de janeiro de 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS e o logotipo do M estilizado so marcas registradas ou marcas comerciais da Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC e so usadas mediante licena. Todas as outras marcas registradas so de propriedade de seus respectivos proprietrios. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, EUA.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF e seu controle, e instrues operacionais para satisfazer os requisitos da FCC sobre o uso como ferramenta ocupacional AVISO: Este rdio foi projetado para ser usado em ambientes ocupacionais controlados, onde os usurios estejam plenamente conscientes da exposio energia de radiofreqncia a que esto sujeitos e podem exercer o controle sobre tal exposio de modo a satisfazer as exigncias de limites de exposio estabelecidos pelo FCC. Esta unidade de rdio NO se destina a venda ao pblico em geral no mercado de consumo de massa, nem se destina ao uso em ambientes diferentes daqueles aqui descritos. Este rdio bidirecional utiliza energia eletromagntica no espectro de radiofreqncia (RF) para permitir a comunicao distncia entre dois ou mais usurios. O rdio utiliza a energia de radiofreqncia ou ondas de rdio para enviar e receber chamadas. A energia de RF uma forma de energia eletromagntica. Este tipo de energia se apresenta sob outras formas, dentre as quais se incluem a luz solar e os raios X. A energia de RF, contudo, no deve ser confundida com estas outras formas de energia eletromagntica que, quando so usadas indevidamente, podem causar danos biolgicos. Nveis muito elevados de raios X, por exemplo, podem produzir danos aos tecidos e ao material gentico. Especialistas em cincias, engenharia, medicina, sade e indstria tm trabalhado conjuntamente com as diferentes organizaes com a finalidade de desenvolver normas que definem os limites prudentes de exposio energia de RF. Estas normas proporcionam os nveis recomendveis de exposio RF, tanto para os trabalhadores quanto para o pblico em geral. Estes nveis recomendados de exposio energia de RF incluem margens de segurana suficientemente amplas. Todos os rdios bidirecionais Motorola so projetados, fabricados e testados de maneira segura de modo a assegurar o cumprimento dos nveis de exposio RF estabelecidos pelos organismos pblicos reguladores. Alm disto, os fabricantes recomendam aos usurios de rdios bidirecionais que sigam as instrues de operao especficas. Estas instrues so importantes uma vez que informam aos usurios a respeito da exposio energia de RF e oferecem procedimentos simples para seu controle. Portugus Brasileiro 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Visite os websites indicados a seguir para obter mais informaes sobre o que se trata a exposio energia de RF e de como controlar esta exposio de modo a garantir a observncia dos limites de exposio estabelecidos. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Regulamentos da Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos As normas do FCC estipulam que os fabricantes de rdios mveis bidirecionais no podero comercializar seus produtos nos Estados Unidos exceto se tais produtos cumprirem com as exigncias de limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pelo FCC. Quando a natureza do trabalho requer o uso de rdios bidirecionais, o FCC exige que os usurios estejam totalmente conscientes dos efeitos da exposio e que sejam capazes de controlar o nvel de exposio a que esto submetidos de modo a satisfazer as exigncias do trabalho. As informaes sobre exposio podem ser facilitadas por meio do uso de uma etiqueta que remeta os usurios fonte de informaes apropriadas. Seu rdio bidirecional Motorola contm uma etiqueta com informaes sobre a exposio energia de RF. Alm disto, no manual do usurio do produto Motorola, ou em um folheto de segurana publicado em separado, esto includas as informaes e instrues de operao necessrias para controlar a exposio energia de RF e para garantir o cumprimento das normas. Conformidade com a normativa sobre a exposio RF Este rdio bidirecional Motorola foi projetado e testado com a finalidade de garantir a sua compatibilidade com as normas e recomendaes nacionais e internacionais descritas a seguir no que se refere a exposio de seres humanos energia eletromagntica de radiofreqncia. Este rdio atende aos limites de exposio estabelecidos pelo IEEE e pela ICNIRP para ambientes ocupacionais ou com controle de exposio energia de radiofreqncia, em ciclos de trabalho de at 50% (50% transmisso/50% recepo) e foi aprovado pelo FCC para uso somente como ferramenta ocupacional. No que se refere medio da energia de RF para a determinao de conformidade com as diretrizes de exposio do FCC, a antena do rdio irradia energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est transmitindo (quando o usurio est falando) e no quando est recebendo

(quando o usurio est ouvindo) ou quando se encontra em espera. 3 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Este rdio bidirecional Motorola satisfaz s seguintes normas e recomendaes relacionadas exposio energia de radiofreqncia:

Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos (FCC), Cdigo de Regulamentos Federais; 47 CFR e seguintes Comisso Federal de Comunicaes dos Estados Unidos (FCC), Boletim OET 65 Instituto de Engenheiros Eltricos e Eletrnicos (IEEE) C95.1 Comisso Internacional para Proteo contra Radiao no Ionizante (ICNIRP) Ministrio da Sade (Canad), Cdigo de segurana 6 Indstria Canad, RSS-102 Autoridade Australiana de Comunicaes, Normativa de Radiocomunicaes e seguintes ANATEL, Anexo Resoluo N. 303 e seguintes. Orientaes gerais de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao Para controlar a exposio a que tanto o usurio como outras pessoas se submetem, e para assegurar o cumprimento dos limites de exposio RF, deve-se observar sempre os procedimentos descritos a seguir. Orientaes gerais:

O equipamento deve estar acompanhado das informaes relacionadas com a energia de RF quando o mesmo for transferido a outros usurios. No utilize este dispositivo sem antes satisfazer os requisitos operacionais aqui descritos. Portugus Brasileiro 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Instrues:

No transmita mais de 50% do tempo, de modo a no ultrapassar o mximo ciclo de trabalho especificado de 50%. Para transmitir (falar) pressione o boto de transmisso (PTT); se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, fale junto ao microfone. O LED vermelho acende quando o rdio est transmitindo. Para receber chamadas, solte o boto PTT. Se o rdio estiver equipado com VOX, pare de falar. O LED vermelho se apaga quando o rdio encerra a transmisso. importante no transmitir mais de 50% do tempo, uma vez que o rdio emite energia de RF mensurvel somente quando est em transmisso (em termos da conformidade com as normas de medio). Transmita somente quando as pessoas de fora do veculo se encontrarem afastadas pelo menos distncia lateral mnima recomendada (conforme mostrado na tabela 1) da carroceria de um veculo equipado com antena devidamente instalada. Esta separao assegura que haja distncia suficiente entre uma antena exterior devidamente instalada (conforme as instrues de instalao) para satisfazer os requisitos de exposio energia de RF estipulados nas normas acima mencionadas. NOTA: A tabela 1 mostrada a seguir indica a distncia lateral recomendada, em um ambiente no controlado, que deve ser mantida pelos transeuntes em relao carroceria de um veculo equipado com uma antena transmissora aprovada e devidamente instalada (isto , monopolos sobre um plano de terra, ou bipolos) para diferentes nveis de potncia nominal de rdios mveis instalados em um veculo. Tabela 1. Potncia nominal do rdio bidirecional mvel instalado em um veculo e distncia lateral mnima recomendada da carroceria do veculo Potncia nominal do rdio mvel (ver nota) Distncia lateral mnima da carroceria do veculo Menos de 7 watts 20 centmetros (8 polegadas) 7 a 14 watts 15 a 39 watts 40 a 110 watts 30 centmetros (1 p) 60 centmetros (2 ps) 90 centmetros (3 ps) 5 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Quando um rdio mvel utilizado juntamente com outro transmissor co-localizado como, por exemplo, um repetidor veicular, o operador do veculo ser responsvel por tomar as medidas necessrias para manter os transeuntes distncia mnima exigida do veculo, de modo a garantir a conformidade com os limites de exposio energia de RF estabelecidos pela FCC para a populao em geral. Para obter mais detalhes, consulte o manual do usurio dos transmissores co-localizados. NOTA: Se no tiver certeza sobre o valor da potncia nominal de seu rdio, entre em contato com o representante ou a concessionria Motorola e informe o nmero de modelo do rdio que aparece na etiqueta do rdio. Se no for possvel determinar a potncia de sada nominal, assegure-se de manter a separao de 1 metro (3 ps) da carroceria do veculo. Usurios de rdios multi-banda sujeitos a diferentes distncias de separao em diferentes bandas operacionais de acordo com a Tabela 1 devem selecionar a maior distncia aplicvel como a mnima distncia lateral para expectadores fora do veculo. A energia mxima exibida da Garantia FCC pode ser maior que a energia nominal permitida para a variao de produo. Orientaes gerais para a instalao das antenas de rdios mveis As orientaes gerais descritas a seguir para a instalao de antenas de rdios mveis se aplicam somente a veculos automotores com carroceria metlica ou a veculos com planos de terra apropriados. As antenas devem ser instaladas na rea central do teto ou da tampa do porta-

malas, levando em considerao as condies de exposio aplicveis aos passageiros do banco traseiro, bem como as instrues e restries especficas mencionadas no manual de instalao do rdio e os requisitos estabelecidos pelo fornecedor da antena. A instalao na tampa do porta-malas limitada a veculos cujas tampas do compartimento de porta-malas sejam planas e claramente definidas e, em alguns casos, a modelos especficos de rdios e antenas. Consulte no manual de instalao do rdio as informaes especficas sobre a localizao e a forma de instalar os diferentes tipos de antenas aprovados para satisfazer deste modo as exigncias de operao recomendadas e assim proteger as pessoas que possam estar expostas. Portugus Brasileiro 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Use somente a antena Motorola fornecida ou uma antena de reposio aprovada pela Motorola. O uso de antenas, modificaes ou acessrios no aprovados poder resultar em dano ao rdio e se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF. Acessrios aprovados Este rdio foi testado e constatou-se que satisfaz as normas de segurana em relao energia de RF sempre que utilizado com os acessrios Motorola fornecidos ou destinados a este produto. O uso de outros acessrios pode se constituir em uma violao das normas de segurana em relao energia de RF. Para uma lista de aprovados Motorola antenas e acessrios, consulte o manual do usurio manual para o seu modelo de rdio. Informaes adicionais Para obter informaes adicionais sobre os requisitos de exposio ou sobre treinamento, visite o seguinte website: http://responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/

index.php/ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Orientaes gerais de controle e conformidade e instrues de operao de rdios mveis bidirecionais instalados como estaes de controle em locais fixos Se um equipamento de rdio mvel for instalado em um local fixo e o mesmo for colocado em funcionamento como uma estao de controle ou como uma unidade fixa, a instalao da antena dever satisfazer os requisitos descritos a seguir, de modo a garantir um rendimento otimizado e para atender aos limites de exposio energia de radiofreqncia estabelecidos nas normas e orientaes mencionadas na pgina 4:

Sempre que for possvel, a antena dever ser instalada fora do edifcio em um teto ou torre. Como acontece em todas as instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos, responsabilidade do licenciado manter o local em conformidade com os regulamentos aplicveis. Tambm possvel que existam requisitos adicionais tais como medies de propagao, colocao de sinalizao de aviso e outras restries de acesso ao local. 7 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Para obter informaes adicionais sobre a instalao, consulte as orientaes relativas s distncias mnimas de separao mencionadas anteriormente na seo denominada Orientaes de conformidade e controle da exposio de RF e instrues de operao, constantes nesse documento. Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle e Instrues Operacionais para Rdios Portteis de Duas Vias Instalados em Embarcaes Martimas Se o equipamento de rdio porttil estiver instalado em uma embarcao e operado como unidade fixa, a instalao da antena deve estar em conformidade com os seguintes requerimentos para assegurar desempenho excelente e conformidade com os limites de exposio energia RF nos padres e diretrizes listadas na pgina 4:

Uma antena destinada para operao Martima deve ser escolhida e instalada de acordo com as recomendaes do fabricante. As antenas devem ser montadas solidamente estrutura da embarcao no local mais alto possvel. Como com todas as instalaes de antena de rdio, responsabilidade do operador manter distncias adequadas da antena e todo o pessoal a bordo da embarcao ou adjacente embarcao. Para informaes adicionais de instalao, veja as diretrizes para distncias de separao mnimas provadas acima na seo Diretrizes de Conformidade e Controle e Instrues Operacionais deste documento. Interferncia e compatibilidade eletromagntica NOTA: Quase todos os dispositivos eletrnicos so susceptveis interferncia eletromagntica se no estiverem devidamente blindados ou se no tiverem sido projetados ou configurados de maneira a serem compatveis com estes tipos de sinais eletromagnticos. possvel que seja necessrio realizar testes de compatibilidade para se determinar se algum dos equipamentos eletrnicos usados nos veculos, prximo a eles ou prximo s instalaes de antenas feitas em locais fixos sensvel energia de radiofreqncia externa, ou se h necessidade de executar algum procedimento para eliminar ou reduzir a possibilidade de interao entre o rdio transmissor e o referido equipamento ou dispositivo. Portugus Brasileiro 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Edificaes Para evitar problemas de interferncia e/ou compatibilidade eletromagntica, desligue o rdio em todos os locais onde houver avisos instruindo neste sentido. Por exemplo, em hospitais e estabelecimentos de assistncia mdica podem estar sendo utilizados equipamentos sensveis energia de RF externa. Veculos Para evitar uma possvel interao entre o rdio transmissor e qualquer um dos mdulos de controle eletrnico do veculo (por exemplo, o controle do sistema anti-

bloqueio de freios (ABS), o controle do motor ou o controle da transmisso), recomenda-se que se contrate um instalador experiente para realizar a instalao do rdio, bem como tomar as seguintes precaues:

1. Consulte as instrues fornecidas pelo fabricante e as demais documentaes tcnicas que contenham recomendaes para a instalao do rdio. 2. Antes de instalar o rdio, determine o local dos mdulos de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento no veculo. 3. Passe toda a fiao do rdio, incluindo a linha de transmisso da antena, o mais distante possvel das unidades de controle eletrnico e do cabeamento correspondente. Segurana ao dirigir Consulte as leis e regulamentos de trnsito referentes ao uso de rdios nos locais em que estiver dirigindo. Obedea sempre estas leis. Quando estiver utilizando o rdio ao dirigir:

Preste ateno ao volante quando estiver dirigindo. Saia da pista e estacione antes de fazer ou receber uma chamada, se as condies de trnsito assim o exigirem. Segurana acstica A exposio a rudos intensos provenientes de qualquer fonte durante perodos de tempo prolongados poder afetar a sua capacidade auditiva temporariamente ou de forma permanente. Quanto mais alto for o volume sonoro do rdio, mais rapidamente sua capacidade auditiva poder ser afetada. O dano auditivo produzido por rudos intensos s vezes poder ser imperceptvel em um primeiro momento. Porm, ele tende a se tornar um efeito cumulativo. 9 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Para proteger a sua capacidade auditiva:

Use a menor intensidade de volume que permita a realizao de suas tarefas. Aumente o volume somente quando estiver em um ambiente ruidoso. Abaixe o volume antes de conectar um fone de ouvido ou acessrio auricular. Limite o tempo de uso de fones de ouvido ou de acessrios auriculares em volume alto. Quando estiver utilizando o rdio sem um fone de ouvido ou acessrio auricular, no coloque o alto-falante do rdio muito prximo ao ouvido. Portugus Brasileiro 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM ADVERTNCIA ADVERTNCIA Advertncias operacionais Veculos com air bag No instale nem coloque um rdio mvel sobre um air bag nem na rea prxima expanso do mesmo. O air bag se expande com grande intensidade. Se houver um rdio porttil na rea de expanso do air bag quando da expanso do mesmo, o rdio poder ser lanado com grande velocidade e causar leses graves aos passageiros. Ambientes potencialmente explosivos Desligue o rdio antes de entrar em reas com atmosferas potencialmente inflamveis. As fascas lanadas em ambientes potencialmente explosivos podem causar uma exploso ou incndio e resultar em leses graves ou inclusive fatais. Entre os ambientes potencialmente explosivos esto as reas com combustveis situadas, por exemplo, na parte inferior de embarcaes, instalaes de transferncia e armazenamento de combustveis ou de produtos qumicos, e reas onde o ar possa conter produtos qumicos ou partculas tais como cereais, poeira comum ou poeira metlica. As reas com ambientes potencialmente explosivos geralmente contm avisos de advertncia, embora nem sempre seja assim. reas de detonao e exploso Para evitar uma possvel interferncia com as operaes de detonao, desligue o rdio quando estiver prximo de detonadores eltricos, em reas de detonao ou onde houver avisos indicando para desligar os rdios bidirecionais. Siga todos os avisos e instrues. No caso de rdios instalados em veculos movidos a gs liqefeito de petrleo, consulte a norma NFPA 58 da Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios dos EUA (National Fire Protection Association) para obter informaes a respeito do armazenamento, manuseio e/ou recipientes. Para obter uma cpia da norma NFPA 58 entre em contato com a Associao Nacional de Proteo contra Incndios, One Battery Park, Quincy, MA, EUA. 11 Portugus Brasileiro 6881095C99_SafetyM_BP.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:23 AM Portugus Brasileiro 12 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 1 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Guide dexposition aux frquences radio (RF) et de scurit des produits pour radios mobiles bidirectionnelles installes dans des vhicules, des navires ou comme stations fixes de surveillance de sites ATTENTION AVANT DUTILISER CETTE RADIO, LISEZ CETTE BROCHURE QUI CONTIENT DIMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS SUR LE MODE DEMPLOI SCURITAIRE DU PRODUIT AINSI QUE DES INFORMATIONS RELATIVES LNERGIE DE RF ET SON CONTRLE, AFIN DASSURER LA CONFORMIT AUX LIMITES DEXPOSITION LNERGIE DE RADIOFRQUENCE TABLIES PAR LES NORMES NATIONALES ET INTERNATIONALES APPLICABLES. Les informations contenues dans ce document remplacent les informations gnrales de scurit des manuels de lutilisateur publis avant janvier 2008. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS et le logo M stylis sont des marques de commerce ou des marques enregistres de Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC et sont utilises sous licence. Toutes les autres marques de commerce appartiennent leurs propritaires respectifs. 2005 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 E. Algonquin Rd., Schaumburg, IL 60196, tats-Unis.

*NNTN7851D*

NNTN7851D

*6881095C99*

6881095C99-J Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 2 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Sensibilisation lexposition lnergie de RF, moyens de contrle et consignes dutilisation pour conformit aux normes du FCC en matire dusage professionnel de cette radio AVIS: Cette radio a t conue pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement contrl, o les utilisateurs sont pleinement conscients de lexposition lnergie de RF laquelle ils sont soumis et peuvent exercer un contrle sur cette exposition afin de respecter les limites tablies par le FCC. Ce dispositif radio Nest PAS autoris pour lensemble de la population, les consommateurs en gnral, ni pour une utilisation autre que celle dcrite ici. Cette radio bidirectionnelle utilise de lnergie lectromagntique dans le spectre des radiofrquences (RF) pour permettre les communications distance entre deux utilisateurs ou plus. Elle utilise lnergie de radiofrquence ou les ondes radio pour mettre et recevoir des appels. Lnergie de RF est une forme dnergie lectromagntique. Ce type dnergie se prsente sous dautres formes, notamment la lumire solaire et les rayons X. Il ne faut cependant pas confondre lnergie de RF avec dautres formes dnergie lectromagntique qui, lorsquelles sont mal utilises, peuvent occasionner des dommages biologiques. Des niveaux trs levs de rayons X, par exemple, peuvent endommager les tissus et le matriel gntique. Les experts en science, en ingnierie, en mdecine, en sciences de la sant et lindustrie travaillent en collaboration avec diffrentes organisations afin dlaborer des normes dfinissant les limites acceptables dexposition lnergie de RF. Ces normes fournissent les niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF, tant pour les travailleurs que pour le public en gnral. Ces niveaux recommands dexposition aux RF comprennent des marges de scurit apprciables. Toutes les radios bidirectionnelles Motorola sont conues, fabriques et testes de manire garantir leur conformit aux niveaux dexposition aux RF tablis par les autorits publiques comptentes. Par ailleurs, les fabricants recommandent aux utilisateurs de radios bidirectionnelles de suivre des directives de fonctionnement spcifiques. Ces directives sont importantes puisquelles informent les utilisateurs sur lexposition lnergie de RF et proposent des moyens simples pour la contrler. Franais Canadien 2 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 3 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Visitez les sites Web suivants pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur ce quest lnergie de RF et sur les mesures de contrles observer afin de respecter les limites tablies en matire dexposition aux RF. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-faqs.html http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/index.html Rglements du Conseil Fdral Amricain des Communications

(FCC) Les rglements du FCC stipulent que les fabricants de radios mobiles bidirectionnelles ne peuvent commercialiser leurs produits aux tats-Unis quaprs avoir vrifi leur conformit aux limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies par le FCC. Lorsque les radios bidirectionnelles sont utilises des fins professionnelles, le FCC exige que les utilisateurs soient pleinement conscients des effets de lexposition et quils soient capables de contrler le niveau dexposition auquel ils se soumettent, afin de rpondre aux exigences de leur profession. Vous pouvez contribuer la sensibilisation lexposition aux RF en apposant des tiquettes renvoyant les utilisateurs vers la source dinformation approprie. Votre radio bidirectionnelle Motorola comporte une tiquette de produit sur lexposition lnergie de RF. Dautre part, vous trouverez dans le manuel de lutilisateur du produit Motorola ou dans la brochure de scurit fournie sparment, les informations requises et le mode demploi permettant de contrler lexposition lnergie de RF et de garantir le respect des normes. Conformit aux normes sur lexposition aux RF Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola a t conue et teste afin de garantir sa conformit aux normes et recommandations nationales et internationales ci-dessous lies lexposition des tres humains lnergie lectromagntique de radiofrquence. Cette radio respecte les limites dexposition tablies par l'IEEE et la ICNIRP pour les environnements professionnels ou avec contrle dexposition lnergie de radiofrquence, des cycles de travail allant jusqu 50% (50% transmission/50% rception) et est approuv par le FCC pour un usage exclusivement professionnel. En ce qui concerne la mesure de lnergie de RF afin dvaluer la conformit aux normes dexposition du FCC, la radio met de lnergie de RF mesurable seulement lorsquelle est en cours de transmission

(conversation), et non pas lorsquelle reoit (coute) ni quand elle est en mode Attente. 3 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 4 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Cette radio bidirectionnelle Motorola est conforme aux normes et aux lignes directrices suivantes relatives lexposition lnergie de RF:

Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC), Code de la rglementation fdrale ; 47CFR et suiv. Conseil fdral amricain des communications (FCC), Bulletin OET 65 Institut des ingnieurs lectriciens et lectroniciens (IEEE), C95.1 Comit international pour la protection contre les radiations non ionisantes

(ICNIRP) Ministre de la sant (Canada), Code de scurit 6 Industrie Canada, RSS-102 Direction australienne de communications, norme de radiocommunications, et suiv. Annexe dANATEL la rsolution No. 303 et suiv. Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle dexposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement Pour contrler lexposition laquelle vous-mme et dautres personnes se soumettent et garantir le respect des limites dexposition aux RF, observez toujours les consignes suivantes. Consignes:

Lorsque lappareil est cd dautres utilisateurs, il doit tre accompagn des informations de sensibilisation des utilisateurs. Nutilisez pas cet appareil si les conditions de fonctionnement dcrites ici ne sont pas runies. Franais Canadien 4 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 5 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Consignes:

Nmettez pas plus de 50% du temps afin de ne pas dpasser le cycle maximal de travail spcifi de 50%. Pour mettre (parler), appuyez sur le bouton de transmission (PTT) ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, parlez dans le microphone. La DEL rouge sallume lorsque la radio met. Pour recevoir des appels, relchez le bouton PTT, ou, si la radio est quipe de VOX, arrtez de parler. La DEL rouge steint lorsque la radio arrte dmettre. Il est important de ne pas mettre plus de 50% du temps tant donn que cette radio gnre une nergie de RF dont lexposition nest mesurable que lors de lmission (en termes de conformit aux normes de mesure). Lmission ne doit se faire que lorsque les personnes situes lextrieur du vhicule se trouvent la distance latrale minimale recommande (indique dans le tableau 1) de la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne convenablement installe. Cette sparation garantit une distance suffisante par rapport une antenne extrieure convenablement installe (conformment aux consignes dinstallation) pour rpondre aux exigences en matire dexposition lnergie de RF stipules dans les normes mentionnes plus haut. REMARQUE: Le tableau 1 ci-dessous indique la distance latrale minimum recommande, dans un environnement non contrl, pour les passants par rapport la carrosserie dun vhicule quip dune antenne mettrice agre et convenablement installe (cest--dire, antenne unipolaire plan de sol, ou doublet) pour diffrents niveaux de puissance nominale de radios mobiles installes dans un vhicule. Tableau 1. Puissance nominale de la radio bidirectionnelle mobile installe dans un vhicule et distance latrale minimale recommande de la carrosserie du vhicule Puissance nominale de la radio mobile (voir Remarque) Moins de 7 watts 7 14 watts 15 39 watts 40 110 watts Distance latrale minimale de la carrosserie du vhicule 20 centimtres (8 pouces) 30 centimtres (1 pied) 60 centimtres (2 pieds) 90 centimtres (3 pieds) 5 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 6 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Lorsqu'une radio mobile est utilise avec un autre metteur ayant la mme position, par exemple un rpteur vhiculaire, il incombe l'oprateur du vhicule de prendre les mesures ncessaires pour maintenir les tiers la distance requise du vhicule de faon garantir la conformit aux limites d'exposition l'nergie de RF tablies par la FCC pour le public en gnral. Pour plus de renseignements, consultez le guide de l'utilisateur relatif aux metteurs ayant la mme position. REMARQUE: Si vous ntes pas sr de la puissance nominale de votre radio, contactez le reprsentant ou le concessionnaire Motorola et indiquez-

lui le numro de modle de la radio qui figure sur ltiquette de celle-ci. Si vous narrivez pas dterminer la puissance de sortie nominale, conservez une distance dun mtre (3 pieds) par rapport la carrosserie du vhicule. Les utilisateurs de radio multi-bandes soumises diffrentes distances de sparation dans diffrentes bandes de fonctionnement selon le tableau 1 devront slectionner la plus grande distance applicable comme distance latrale minimale pour les personnes se trouvant l'extrieur du vhicule. La puissance maximale indique sur lautorisation de la FCC peut tre suprieure la puissance nominale si lon tient compte des variations de production. Consignes dinstallation pour les antennes de radios mobiles Les consignes suivantes pour linstallation dantennes de radios mobiles sont applicables uniquement aux vhicules automobiles carrosserie mtallique ou aux vhicules plans de sol appropris. Les antennes doivent tre installes au centre du toit ou du capot du coffre, en tenant compte des conditions dexposition des passagers du sige arrire, ainsi que des consignes et restrictions spcifiques mentionnes dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio et des exigences tablies par le fournisseur de lantenne. Les installations sur le capot du coffre sont rserves aux vhicules quips de coffres surfaces planes clairement dfinies et dans la plupart des cas, des modles spcifiques de radios et dantennes. Consultez dans le manuel dinstallation de la radio les informations spcifiques relatives lemplacement et au mode dinstallation des diffrents types dantennes agrs, destines fournir toute personne risquant dtre expose les distances de fonctionnement recommandes. Utilisez uniquement lantenne agre fournie par Motorola ou une antenne de rechange agre Motorola. Lutilisation dantennes, de modifications ou Franais Canadien 6 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 7 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM daccessoires non agrs peut endommager la radio et constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF. Accessoires agrs Cette radio a t teste et dclare conforme aux normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF lorsquelle est utilise avec les accessoires Motorola fournis ou dsigns pour ce produit. Lutilisation dautres accessoires peut constituer une violation des normes de scurit en matire dnergie de RF. Pour obtenir une liste de Motorola antennes approuves et accessoires, reportez-

vous l'utilisateur manuel de votre modle de radio. Informations complmentaires Pour obtenir plus de renseignements sur les exigences en matire dexposition ou des informations de formation, visitez le site: http://

responsibility.motorolasolutions.com/index.php/ourapproach/wirelesscommhealth/. Directives de contrle et de conformit et consignes de fonctionnement des radios bidirectionnelles mobiles installes comme stations de contrle emplacements fixes. Si un appareil de radio mobile est install dans un endroit fixe et quil est utilis comme station de contrle ou comme unit fixe, linstallation de lantenne doit rpondre aux exigences ci-dessous afin de garantir un rendement optimal et de respecter les limites dexposition lnergie de RF tablies dans les normes et directives numres page 4 :

Dans la mesure du possible, lantenne doit tre monte sur le toit ou sur une tour, lextrieur du btiment. Comme pour toutes les installations dantennes emplacements fixes, il incombe au grant de maintenir lemplacement en conformit avec les rglements en vigueur. Par ailleurs, dautres exigences peuvent sappliquer, telles que des mesures de propagation, la pose de panneaux et des restrictions de laccs lemplacement afin dtre certain que les limites dexposition mentionnes ne sont pas dpasses. Pour toute information d'installation supplmentaire, consultez les directives relatives aux distances de sparation minimum fournies ci-dessus dans la section de ce document intitule Directives en matire de conformit et de contrle d'exposition aux RF et consignes de fonctionnement. 7 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 8 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Directivesdeconformitetdecontrleetconsignes d'exploitationpourlesradiosmobilesbidirectionnelles installssurlesnavires Si un appareil de radio mobile est install sur un navire et utilis comme appareil fixe, l'installation de l'antenne devra tre conforme aux exigences suivantes en vue d'assurer une performance optimale et le respect des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio

(RF) stipules dans les normes et lignes directrices figurant la page 4:

Une antenne usage maritime devra tre choisie et installe conformment aux Les antennes devront tre montes solidement la structure du navire et places le recommandations du fabricant. plus haut possible. Comme avec toutes les installations d'antennes de radio, il est de la responsabilit de l'exploitant de maintenir des distances suffisantes entre l'antenne et tout le personnel bord ou proximit du navire. Pour plus d'informations sur l'installation, voir les recommandations pour les distances de sparation minimales exposes ci-dessus dans les Recommandations pour la conformit et le contrle de lexposition aux RF, ainsi que la section Instructions dutilisation de ce document. Interfrence et compatibilit lectromagntique REMARQUE: La grande majorit des dispositifs lectroniques sont sensibles leffet lectromagntique perturbateur (EMI) sils ne sont pas convenablement protgs ou sils ne sont pas conus ou configurs de telle sorte quils soient compatibles avec ce type de signaux lectromagntiques. Il se peut que des tests de compatibilit soient ncessaires afin de dterminer si lun des appareils lectroniques utiliss lintrieur ou proximit des vhicules ou proximit dantennes emplacements fixes est sensible lnergie de RF externe ou sil faut prendre des mesures quelconques pour liminer ou attnuer le risque dinteraction entre la radio mettrice et lappareil ou le dispositif. Btiments Afin dviter des problmes dinterfrence et/ou de compatibilit lectromagntique, teignez la radio dans tous les tablissements o des panneaux daffichage vous invitent le faire. Il se peut, par exemple, que les hpitaux ou les tablissements de sant utilisent des appareils sensibles lnergie de RF externe. Franais Canadien 8 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 9 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Vhicules Afin dviter une ventuelle interaction entre la radio mettrice et lun des modules de contrle lectronique du vhicule (par exemple, le contrle du systme de freinage antiblocage (ABS), le contrle du moteur ou le contrle de la transmission) il est recommand de faire appel uniquement un installateur qualifi pour raliser linstallation de la radio et de prendre les prcautions suivantes :

1. Consultez la notice du fabricant ou toute autre documentation technique contenant des recommandations pour linstallation de la radio. 2. Avant dinstaller la radio, dterminez lemplacement des modules de contrle lectronique et du cblage lintrieur du vhicule. 3. Faites passer tout le cblage de la radio, y compris la ligne de transmission de lantenne, le plus loin possible des units de contrle lectronique et du cblage correspondant. Scurit lors de la conduite Consultez la lgislation et les rglements en vigueur sur lutilisation des radios dans les zones o vous conduisez. Respectez toujours ces rgles. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio en conduisant:

Concentrez-vous entirement sur votre conduite et sur la route. Rangez-vous sur le bas-ct et stationnez votre vhicule avant de faire ou de rpondre un appel, si les conditions de conduite lexigent. Scurit acoustique L'exposition des bruits forts de n'importe quelle source pendant de longues priodes peut affecter temporairement ou de manire permanente votre audition. Plus le volume de la radio est lev, plus votre audition risque de se dtriorer rapidement. Les dommages auditifs causs par des bruits forts sont parfois indtectables au dbut et peuvent avoir un effet cumulatif. 9 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 10 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Pour protger votre audition:

Rglez le volume au plus bas niveau possible ncessaire pour effectuer votre travail. volumes. N'augmentez le volume que si vous tes dans un environnement bruyant. Baissez le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des oreillettes. Utilisez le moins longtemps possible un casque ou des oreillettes de forts Lorsque vous utilisez la radio sans casque ou oreillettes, ne placez pas le haut-parleur de la radio directement sur votre oreille. Franais Canadien 10 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 11 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM AVERTISSEMENT AVERTISSEMENT Avertissements de fonctionnement Vhicules quips de sac gonflable vitez de monter ou de placer une radio mobile au-dessus dun sac gonflable ou dans la zone de dploiement de ce dernier. Les sacs gonflables se dploient avec une force considrable. Si une radio se trouve dans la zone de dploiement du sac lorsque celui-ci se gonfle, la radio peut tre propulse avec une force considrable et risque alors doccasionner de graves lsions corporelles aux passagers. Atmosphres potentiellement explosives teignez la radio avant de pntrer dans une atmosphre potentiellement explosive. La moindre tincelle dans ce type d'atmosphre peut provoquer une explosion ou un incendie et entraner des lsions corporelles ou mme la mort. Parmi les zones potentiellement explosives, citons les zones davitaillement en carburant, par exemple la cale des bateaux, les installations de transfert et de stockage de carburant ou de produits chimiques et les zones dans lesquelles lair est charg en produits chimiques ou en particules telles que de la poudre de crales, de la poussire ou de la poudre mtallique. Les zones atmosphres potentiellement explosives affichent gnralement des panneaux de mise en garde, mais ce nest pas toujours le cas. Dtonateurs et zones de dynamitage Afin dviter toute interfrence ventuelle avec les oprations de dtonation, teignez la radio proximit de dtonateurs lectriques, dans une zone de dtonations ou l o sont affichs des panneaux vous invitant teindre les radios bidirectionnelles. Respectez tous les panneaux et toutes les consignes. En ce qui concerne les radios installes dans des vhicules fonctionnant au GPL, consultez la norme NFPA 58 de lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association) pour obtenir des informations sur le stockage, la manipulation et/ou les conteneurs. Pour obtenir une copie de la norme GPL, NFPA 58, contactez lAssociation amricaine pour la protection contre lincendie (National Fire Protection Association), One Battery Park, Quincy, MA. 11 Franais Canadien 6881095C99_SafetyM_FrCan.fm Page 12 Tuesday, March 6, 2012 11:17 AM Franais Canadien 12